JP6788193B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine that uses a game ball or a game medal as a game medium, and a slot machine that uses a game medal.

Generally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a main control board that controls a game and a sub-control board that performs control processing based on a command from the main control board. As the above-mentioned sub-control board, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine, a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an illumination control board, an acoustic control board, and the like can be exemplified. Furthermore, in game machines such as paragraph game machines, various effects are performed using the effect control board, and as a type of effect, the characters that appear and the expectation of big hits (in slot machines, type 1 BB and specific small roles) It is known that there is a correlation with the expected value of establishment, the expected value of the number of AT games added, etc. (paragraph 0046 of Patent Document 1, etc.).
Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-011632

By the way, in a game machine such as the above-mentioned pachinko game machine, how to use the character in the production is an element that affects the taste of the game. Further, the jackpot expectation as described above is an index that can give the player information such as whether or not the jackpot is likely to occur. Then, how to relate the character and the index related to the hit and use it for the production is an important factor for enhancing the taste of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of effectively utilizing the correlation between a character and an index related to a hit.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention includes a main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game.
An effect control means (sub-main board, etc.) that receives effect control information (main command, etc.) from the main control means and performs control processing according to the effect control information.
An image display means (such as an effect display device) that displays an image related to the effect determined by the effect control means is provided.
The main control means
In order to obtain a predetermined random number (such as a winning / failing random number) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, perform a lottery based on the acquired random number, and obtain a predetermined lottery result, and make a profit state for the player. Process and
The effect control means can determine a list effect that causes the image display means to display a plurality of characters in a list in a predetermined arrangement order.
The arrangement order of the characters is determined by a predetermined first sort, and when there are characters having the same arrangement order determined by the first sort for a plurality of characters displayed in the list effect, the first sort. The arrangement order of a plurality of characters whose arrangement order is the same when arranged by one sort is determined by the second sort based on a rule different from the first sort .
The first sort and the second sort are sorts based on an index of the degree of expectation that a player is given a profit or the degree of advantage of a profit that can be given to a player, and the index is used to perform a predetermined effect. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it may be changed under the circumstances .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of effectively utilizing the correlation between the character and the index related to the hit.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of one Example of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the main board structure of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the basic functional means of a main board, a sub-main board, and a sub-sub board. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the main control display device, and (b) is a chart showing the relationship between each indicator lamp and the name in the main control display device. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example during the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example while the effect symbol is also stopped. (A) is a chart showing a hit / fail determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table for removal. (A) is a chart showing a big hit symbol judgment table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing a big hit symbol judgment table for the second lottery, and (c) is a chart showing a small hit symbol judgment table used at the time of a small hit. It is a chart. (A) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a miss, (b) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a 15R big hit, and (c) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a 5R big hit and a small hit. Is. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress interrupt processing in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-main initial setting process in a sub-main board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a sub-main board. It is a flowchart which shows the main command reception processing in a sub-main board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a sub-main board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game state in a pachinko game machine. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a basic special game, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a flow when a predetermined effect is executed at a timing different from that of (a). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bullet hole notice, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the fluctuation timer effect, (b-1) is an explanatory diagram showing the characteristics of the fluctuation pattern table related to the fluctuation block, and (b-2) is the fluctuation pattern table shown in (b-1). Is an explanatory diagram showing an effect example using the above, and (b-3) is an explanatory diagram showing another effect example. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a part of the fluctuation pattern table, (b-1) is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the contents of a part of the fluctuation pattern table, and (b-2) is another one. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the content of the variation pattern table of a part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game state in embodiment which performs list production. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect display example when a list effect is performed in a round effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged display example of a shift effect. (A) is a chart showing the values related to the first index and the second index in each case during the round effect and the variable effect, and (b) is a chart showing a calculation example of the winning percentage of each character during the round effect. (A) is a chart showing an example of calculating the winning percentage of each character when the normal frequency table is used during the variation effect, and (b) each character when the retirement effect using the limited frequency table is executed during the variation effect. (C) is a chart showing an example of calculating the winning percentage of each character, and (c) is a chart showing an example of calculating the winning percentage of each character when the morale lowering effect using the limited frequency table is also executed during the fluctuation effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect display example when "ALL_MAX_zone" is performed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect display example when "Character K participation" is performed. (A) is a chart showing the relationship between the number of time reductions and the limited frequency pattern table in the embodiment in which the list effect is changed according to the number of time reductions, and (b) is an explanation showing an example of production display when a circular list display is performed. It is a figure.

Hereinafter, examples of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment will be described, and then, the game procedure, the production, the control mode, and the like in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of Pachinko game machine>

FIG. 1 shows the front configuration of the pachinko game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko game machine 10, the game board 50 is mounted on the game machine frame 11 described later. Of these, the game board 50 has different components such as accessories and designs depending on the model of the pachinko game machine 10. Further, the game board 50 can be separated from the game machine frame 11 by canceling the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the game machine frame 11.

Further, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the game machine frame 11 for the game board 50 of a plurality of models, it is possible to change the so-called model in which the game machine frame 11 is shared between different models. There is. In the following, the game machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board surface configuration of the game board 50 will be described.

The game machine frame 11 described above has an outer frame 12, a front frame 13, and a lower front plate 14. Further, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13. Of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used for fixing the pachinko game machine 10 to a predetermined position in the island facility in the game hall (game store), and as shown in FIG. 1, glass. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 described above have an opening portion in which the front side is closed.

The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via the hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge portion in FIG. 1 as the fixed end and the right edge portion as the free end.

The front frame 13 is locked to the outer frame 12 and released from the outer frame 12 via a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder portion 17 of the locking device is arranged on the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13 as described above. Through 16, the keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko game machine 10. Then, when the amusement park clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key counterclockwise, for example, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is opened. Become.

With respect to such a front frame 13, the above-mentioned lower front plate 14 does not have a configuration for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

The glass door 15 arranged at the front portion of the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can swing independently with the left edge portion in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge portion as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are opened by, for example, a game hall clerk who swings horizontally forward, and swings horizontally backward from the open state to lock the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16. As a result, it becomes closed.

Locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and release from the front frame 13 are performed via the above-mentioned locking device (not shown). That is, when the amusement park clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 described above and turns the key clockwise, for example, opposite to when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. The glass door 15 is opened.

Further, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the dish unit 16 appears and can be operated, and a game hall clerk moves the operating portion (not shown) of the locking mechanism downward, for example. By the pushing operation, the dish unit 16 is opened.

Further, the glass door 15 holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates detachably, and when the glass door 15 is in a closed state, the game board 50 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine 10 through these transparent plates. I am doing it. As the transparent plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used in addition to the glass plate.

The plate unit 16 has an upper ball plate 18, a lower ball plate 19, a launch handle 20, and the like on the front surface thereof. Of these, the upper ball plate 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launching device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via the launch handle 20, and plays games on the lower ball plate 19. It is equipped with mechanisms for various functions such as ejecting balls. Further, the lower ball plate 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball plate 18, and stores the game balls in a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko game machine 10. It is equipped with a mechanism for various functions such as discharge.

Further, in the present embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in parts such as the upper corner of the glass door 15 and the lower front plate 14, and through these speakers 21, depending on the game state, the effect pattern, and the like. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Further, an operation button 22 that can be pressed by the player is provided on the upper ball plate 18 toward the player (see FIG. 1). The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper part of the upper ball plate 18, and is located near the center of the upper ball plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is provided with a light emitting body for operation buttons (not shown) inside, and outputs light according to an effect pattern to be executed.

The operation button 22 may be projected upward or vibrated in a predetermined case by using a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. Further, although not shown, a cross key is provided in addition to the operation button 22, and various environment settings and effect operations can be performed by the player using the cross key. Then, as the contents of the environment setting, the volume adjustment of the speaker 21, the brightness adjustment and the light amount adjustment of the effect display described later, the change of the effect mode described later, and the like can be exemplified. Further, as the effect operation using the cross key, a mini game or the like during variable display can be exemplified. Further, in addition to the cross key, for example, a lever-shaped operating means, various types of touch panels, and the like can be used.
<Back configuration of Pachinko game machine>

Next, the basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko game machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, a set base 31 provided with a game ball passage for guiding or collecting the game balls is attached to the back surface of the front frame 13, and the game machine is below the set base 31. A power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the whole and a payout control board 103 for controlling the game machine frame side are attached. Further, on the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 that controls the entire game and a sub board 104 that executes effect control based on control commands from the main board 102 are set boards 31. It is provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of.

In the set base 31, the prize ball tank 33 is provided above the above-mentioned opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island facility and used as prize balls. Further, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided.

The payout unit 35 communicates with the prize ball passage 34 and can discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game ball flowed down from the payout unit 35 to the ball plate (upper ball plate 18 or lower ball plate 19) as a prize ball.

As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply unit 32 described above is provided at a lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko game machine 10 is viewed from the rear. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts the AC power supplied from the outside of the game machine into various voltages used in the game machine and supplies the AC power to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Further, the power supply unit 32 is provided with a power supply switch 40 which is a tilt switch.

As shown in FIG. 2, the payout control board 103 described above is arranged at a lower right portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function that controls the payout unit 35 in response to a command relating to payout from the main board 102 or a loan request from the outside. Further, the payout control board 103 also has a launch control function for controlling the launch device 43 so that the game ball is launched into the game area with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1).

The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged at the lower center on the back side of the game board 50, and is mainly used for various lottery functions, control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104, and the like. It has the core processing functions of 10. The above-mentioned sub-board 104 is arranged in the upper center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

Regarding the above-mentioned sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) that plays a main role in effect control and a sub-sub-board (this implementation) that specializes in a specific effect function such as image creation. In the example, it is divided into a sub-sub-board 302), but the term "sub-board" includes these. Further, on the upper right portion on the back side of the set board 31, an external relay terminal board 46 for relaying signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like to an external device of the pachinko game machine 10 is provided.
<Board composition of the game board>

Next, the above-mentioned game board 50 and parts (board surface parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, transparent acrylic resin). Further, the game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The game board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 with the plate surface on which various board surface parts are mounted facing forward, and is mounted on the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 by a closed glass door 15 or the like. It is designed to cover the front. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, the game area 52 is formed by combining the inner rail and the outer rail formed in a curved strip shape.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 52, the first start winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63, the first large winning opening 91 and the second major winning opening 92, the left operating opening 68a and the right operating opening 68b, a plurality of general winning openings 72, an out opening 58, and the like are provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying for the effect, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

Further, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown), a mechanism such as a windmill, and the like. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left of the game area 52 of the game board 50. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the board surface configuration of the game board 50 as described above may vary depending on, for example, the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko game machine 10. Then, another embodiment relating to the board surface configuration will be described later.
<Functions of board parts>

Subsequently, specific functions and configurations related to the above-mentioned individual board surface parts will be described. First, the above-mentioned first start winning opening 62 is a starting winning opening related to the first game, and is of a type in which the entrance of the game ball is always opened and the size of the entrance of the game ball is not changed. Further, the first start winning opening 62 has a first starting winning detection device 74 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is described above. Is input to the main board 102 of.

The above-mentioned second start winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening related to the second game. The second start winning opening 63 is an ordinary electric accessory (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and is a blade that opens when the ordinary symbol described later is stopped and displayed in a hit manner. It is equipped with an opening / closing blade). Then, the second start winning opening 63 opens the opening / closing blade for a predetermined time based on the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 63. It will be possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 includes a second starting winning detection device 75 (sensor) and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening / closing blade. .. The output signal of the second start winning prize detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes for opening the second starting winning opening 63. These opening modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as "short opening" or "short opening") or a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as "long opening", "long opening", etc.). It is also possible to provide a mode of middle opening set to an opening time between short opening and long opening. Then, various opening modes related to the second starting winning opening 63 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 includes a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

When the general winning detection device 73 is shared by the plurality of general winning openings 72, the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning openings 72 are gathered at the place where the general winning detection device 73 is arranged and detected. It is possible to do. Further, the plurality of general prize openings 72 can be grouped according to the positional relationship or the number of prize balls (shared by the general prize detection device 73). The specific mode of paying out the prize balls will be described later.

The above-mentioned first prize-winning opening 91 has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the first winning opening 91 is provided with a first opening / closing door (not shown) for opening / closing the above-mentioned opening. Then, when a predetermined hit occurs, the first large winning opening 91 performs an opening operation in a predetermined mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first large winning opening 91 opens and closes and drives the first large winning detection device 78 for detecting the entry of a game ball and the above-mentioned first opening / closing door. The winning opening solenoid 80 is provided. Of these, the first grand prize detection device 78 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first grand prize opening 91, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

The above-mentioned second prize opening 92 has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the second prize opening 92 is provided with a second opening / closing door (not shown) for opening / closing the above-mentioned opening. Then, when a predetermined hit occurs, the second large winning opening 92 performs an opening operation in a predetermined mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second large winning opening 92 opens and closes and drives the second large winning detection device 79 for detecting the entry of the game ball and the above-mentioned second opening / closing door. The winning opening solenoid 81 is provided. Of these, the second grand prize detection device 79 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first grand prize opening 91, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

In this embodiment, decorative plates 91b and 92b are provided in front of the first prize opening 91 and the second prize opening 92, respectively. The decorative plates 91b and 92b are made of a transparent material so that the player can visually recognize the first opening / closing door, the second opening / closing door, the first winning opening 91, and the second winning opening 92. .. In addition, characters and figures for decorating the game area 52 may be drawn on each decorative plate, but in this case as well, the characters and figures may be drawn on the first prize opening 91 and the second prize opening 92. It is desirable that the game ball does not interfere with the visibility of the entered game ball.

As shown in FIG. 3, the left operating port 68a described above includes a left passage detecting device 69a, and the right operating port 68b includes a right passing detecting device 69b. Further, these passage detection devices 69a and 69b have sensors for detecting the passage of the game ball at the corresponding operation ports 68a and 68b. Then, the output signal of the sensor in each passage detection device 69a, 69b is input to the main board 102, and each passage detection device 69a, 69b changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of the ball entering.

The center decoration 64 described above has a function of directing and the like, and an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided inside the center decoration 64. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED passes through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs the light decoration.

Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with movable effect members 93, 94 and the like, and these movable effect members 93, 94 form a gimmick for effect. Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed in a portion of the center decoration 64 on the right side when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has a function of a flow path of a game ball in addition to the above-mentioned effect function. Have.

Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 90. Although not shown, the light guide plate 90 can be, for example, one provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surfaces facing forward and backward. Further, the light guide plate 90 is attached to the center decoration 64, and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 90 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64.

The light guide plate 90 can be configured as follows, for example. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged side by side in a band shape so as to face one end face of the transparent plate, for example, the left and right end faces. Then, in a normal state, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can see it without superimposing another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

However, the inside of each transparent plate constituting the light guide plate 90 is formed with fine irregularities that cannot be visually recognized under a normal environment. Then, at the time of executing the predetermined effect, for example, the above-mentioned light source facing the end face of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light of the light source is emitted from the end face of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. To. Further, the light is diffused by the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and the diffused light causes a predetermined illustration or the like to be colored and emerge so that the player can recognize it.

Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 90, the other transparent plate is engraved with irregularities for forming an image different from the above-mentioned illustrations and the like. Then, by driving the light source facing the end face at the time of a predetermined effect, an illustration or the like different from the above-mentioned one emerges so that the player can recognize it.

Here, it is possible to direct the light source not only to one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate but also to one of the upper and lower end faces, and to project another illustration or the like by the light of this light source. By doing so, it is possible to display two types of images on one transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one or three or more. It is also possible to use a transmissive liquid crystal display instead of or in combination with the light guide plate 90.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 is a device in which a large number of 7-segment display bodies and LED indicator lights are arranged on a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256. The main control display device 53 includes a normal symbol display unit 59 that displays the above-mentioned normal symbol, a first special symbol display unit 70 that displays a first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game. A second special symbol display unit 71 for displaying the second special symbol (described later) corresponding to the above, and various other display units are formed. The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display unit 59 constitutes an ordinary symbol display device. Further, the first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes the first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes the second special symbol display device. The details of each display unit formed on the main control display device 53 will be described later.

In the following, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "first special symbol", "special diagram 1", "special 1", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be referred to as "second special figure", "special figure 2", "special figure 2", or the like. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".
<Basic game procedure>

Subsequently, the game procedure in the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where the game ball is supplied to the above-mentioned upper ball plate 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned launch handle 20, the upper ball plate 18 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in the container are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the game ball is guided by the above-mentioned inner rail and outer rail, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is discharged from between the inner rail and the outer rail to the game area 52.

In a normal game, the player fires the game ball so as to flow down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the first start winning opening 62 located in the lower central portion of the game area 52. Such a mode of launching mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is so-called left-handed. Further, the firing of the game ball is repeated at predetermined time intervals (for example, at intervals not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the launching device 43 described above while the player is operating the firing handle 20. Then, the game balls continuously released into the game area 52 fall in a direction according to factors such as the speed and the incident angle (or reflection angle) while interfering with a plurality of game nails and wind turbines.

When the game ball falls into various winning openings such as the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 and the first starting winning opening 62, the winning ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 18 as prize balls via the above-mentioned payout unit 35 according to the type of the winning opening. Further, when the upper ball plate 18 is filled with many game balls and the subsequent game balls paid out cannot enter the upper ball plate 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball plate 19 as overflow balls. ..

In addition, the game balls that have fallen into various winning openings become safe balls and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. Further, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port 58, and is guided to the back surface side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball that has reached the back surface side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter or a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 toward the above-mentioned island facility side. Is discharged.

The left operating port 68a and the right operating port 68b described above are gates through which the game ball passes, unlike the winning opening for generating the safe ball described above. In the following, the left operating port 68a and the right operating port 68b are referred to as a "winning opening", and the terms "falling in", "winning ball", and "winning" in this embodiment refer to "passing" related to the gate. It shall include meaning.

When the game ball enters the operating port (here, the left operating port 68a or the right operating port 68b), if the predetermined fluctuation start condition (normal figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied, the main control is performed. On the display device 53, a normal symbol (described later) is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (general drawing lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the operating port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. To.

When the game ball enters the start opening (here, the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), the predetermined fluctuation start condition (special figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied. For example, on the main control display device 53, a special symbol (described later) is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on the ball entering the starting port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. ..

In the effect display device 60 described above, the effect display related to the special symbol is performed. This effect display differs depending on whether the special symbol is in the variable display or the stop display, and whether the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit or an outlier. In relation to this, various predetermined modes of production are performed.

In the special game (big hit), the unit game in which the first big winning opening 91 or the second big winning opening 92 is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Further, the special game includes a unit game in which the unit game is repeated a maximum number of times and a special game in which the unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. As the maximum number of times, 15 times (15R (round)) and the like can be exemplified, and as the number of times less than the maximum number of times, 5 times (5R) and the like can be exemplified. In addition, a special game in which a unit game in which the opening of the large winning opening is executed is performed only once is referred to as a "small hit".

In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the corresponding large winning opening (first large winning opening 91 or second large winning opening 92), or the total opening time. When the predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) is reached, the end condition is satisfied and the corresponding large winning opening is closed. The total opening time as the end condition of the unit game indicates that the upper limit is set even when the opening of the large winning openings is divided into multiple times in one unit game. ing. By opening multiple prize openings within a unit game, technical intervention is enhanced, and by opening one time, it is possible to easily get a ball, so that the game playability during big hits can be broadened. The opening mode of the big winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game property in which a plurality of games (here, two) corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko game machine are mixed is adopted. That is, in this embodiment, the plurality of games described above can be divided into a first game in which the first start winning opening 62 is used and a second game in which the second starting winning opening 63 is used. Then, in a situation where the second game is prioritized over the first game and at the same time the start condition of the game is satisfied, the second game is preferentially executed and the first game is reserved. The first game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery described above. This specific game is different from the above-mentioned special game, and is in a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In this embodiment, as the specific game, a probability variation game (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation"), a variation time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction"), and a ball entry facilitation game are provided. As the specific game, there are those in which only one of the probability change, the time saving, and the ball entry facilitation game is executed, and there are those in which a plurality of specific games are performed at the same time, and different game characteristics are created by combining them.

When the specific game is executed, the notification regarding the launch position and launch timing of the game ball recommended by the image or sound of the effect display device 60 (for example, an effect that encourages right-handed hitting) is executed. Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and launches the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 is launched. , Enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. Further, the game ball released from the center decoration 64 falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting the game nails and other structures while hitting the game balls.

A part of the large number of game balls emitted from the center decoration 64 passes through the right operating port 68b (see FIG. 1) and is detected by the right passage detecting device 69b (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the right operating port 68b, the above-mentioned normal symbol is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A), and the variable display of the normal symbol is a predetermined hit. When stopped in the mode, the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 expands for a predetermined time according to the hit mode.

In this embodiment, the game ball reaching the right side of the game area 52 can be guided to the periphery of the second starting winning opening 63 and the second large winning opening 92 by a nail or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entry facilitation game is added to the time saving, which is a specific game, and during the time reduction, the opening extension of the normal electric accessory and the normal electric role are performed by the ball entry facilitation game. The combination of the probability fluctuation of the object and the time reduction of the ordinary electric accessory is performed, and the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory described above becomes easy to be executed. Then, during the time saving, when the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 is expanded once, one or a plurality of game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63. ing.

When a big hit occurs and a special game is executed, the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening 92 are opened, but during this special game, the player is hit right. It is possible to make it. Then, in this case, before the start of the special game, it is conceivable to execute an effect of urging the player to hit right by the image or sound of the effect display device 60.
<Example of jackpot type: ST>

Next, the types of jackpots in the above-mentioned first game and second game will be described. First, as jackpots, a jackpot that repeats the above-mentioned unit game 15 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "15R jackpot") and a jackpot that repeats the unit game 7 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "7R jackpot") are provided. .. The lottery mode for these big hits will be described later.

The above-mentioned unit game is started in a special game with the opening of the first large winning opening 91 (or the second large winning opening 92), and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or when the first large winning opening is passed. It ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) of game balls fall into the winning opening 91 (or the second major winning opening 92), and the first major winning opening 91 (or the second major winning opening 92) is closed. To do. A special game in which such a unit game is repeated is based on a so-called ball ejection (sometimes referred to as a ball ejection) for the purpose of having a player acquire a game ball. Further, among various jackpots, 15R jackpots and 7R jackpots are intended to make the player acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a type of a part of the jackpot, for example, a part of the 15R jackpot or a part of the 15R jackpot can be provided with a non-probable change (15R normal or 7R normal). Further, for example, even with a 15R jackpot, the opening period of the first jackpot 91 (or the second jackpot 92) is short, and only the same amount of balls as the 5R jackpot can be obtained (15R). It is possible to provide a probability change (actual 5R)), or to provide something that makes it almost impossible to get a ball even if it is a 5R jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific gaming states such as probability change and time reduction are generated for a predetermined specific jackpot. As a mode of occurrence of such a specific game state, it is possible to provide a big hit that does not give at least one of the privilege functions such as probability change, time reduction, and ball entry facilitation game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a probability change or a big hit with only a short time. Furthermore, it is possible to make different types of jackpots depending on the difference in the duration of the probability change and the difference in the duration of the shortened working hours. In addition, when the electric chew support is also executed during the time reduction, the "duration of the electric chew support" can be rephrased as the "duration of the electric chew support". Furthermore, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support out of the time saving and the electric chew support.

However, the combination of the big hit and the probability change, the time reduction, etc. is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, the probability variation may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all the 15R jackpots in this embodiment are 15R jackpots with probability changes (15R probability variation), and all 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with probability variation (7R probability variation).
<Hits other than big hits>

Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a type of hit other than the big hit. When this small hit occurs in the first game (or the second game), the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) is opened, for example, once. The lottery mode for small hits will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of main control display device >>

Next, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control display device 53 is configured by arranging a segment display body and a large number of LED display lights on a symbol display board 256 and superimposing a transparent plate in front of various display bodies. Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 is located on the upper left portion of the symbol display board 256 when viewed from the front, in order from the left, the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232. , Has a main control error indicator 233.

The first state indicator lamp 231 arranges two linear LED segments in a row to form a digit in the form of the number "1". The second state indicator light 232 combines seven linear LED segments to form a digit in the form of the number "8". Further, the main control error indicator 233 is composed of a perfect circular main control error indicator dot attached to the lower right of the second state indicator 232.

The above-mentioned first state indicator light 231 and second state indicator light 232 can display numbers 0 to 19, alphabet letters, hyphens and other symbols by selectively lighting the LEDs of each segment. It has become. Further, by blinking the LED or changing the blinking pattern, it is possible to display more diverse information. The first state indicator light 231 and the second state indicator light 232 are used, for example, to display the number of rounds when a big hit occurs in the above-mentioned first game or second game and a special game is executed. .. Further, the main control error indicator 233 can be used, for example, for displaying an error.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, two, four, ten, and ten LED indicator lights are arranged side by side at a predetermined pitch on the symbol display substrate 256 in order from the top. A total of 26 LED indicator lights are the remaining parts of the symbol display board 256 with respect to the parts where the first state indicator light 231 and the second state indicator light 232 and the main control error indicator light 233 are arranged. They are arranged in an orderly manner. Here, in FIG. 6A, for convenience of explanation, the symbols A to Z are shown on a total of 26 LED indicator lamps. Then, in the following description, each LED indicator lamp may be distinguished by the reference numerals A to Z attached in FIG. 6A.

These LED indicator lights A to Z can also display predetermined information according to the presence / absence of lighting and the blinking pattern. FIG. 6B shows the relationship between the LED indicator lamps A to Z shown in FIG. 6A and the name. Among these, the LED indicator lights A to C are a first LED for normal symbol storage display, a second LED for normal symbol memory display, and a normal symbol display LED related to a normal symbol, which will be described later. Further, the LED indicator lights D and E are the third state indicator light and the fourth state indicator light, and the LED indicator light F is, for example, a right-handed indicator light that lights up when the above-mentioned right-handed operation should be performed. Of these, the third state indicator light (D) is used to display the operating state of the probability fluctuation function related to the special symbol, and the fourth state indicator light (E) is the operating state of the probability fluctuation function related to the normal symbol. Is used to display.

Further, eight LED indicator lights G to N constitute the first special symbol display unit 70, and the LED indicator lights O and P are the first LED for the first special symbol storage display and the first special symbol storage, respectively. This is the second LED for display. The eight LED indicator lights Q to X constitute the second special symbol display unit 71, and the LED indicator lights Y and Z are the first LED for the second special symbol storage display and the second special symbol storage, respectively. This is the second LED for display. In FIG. 6A, since the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are coded, each LED indicator lamp is enclosed by a wave bracket symbol. Is shown.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display unit 59 is composed of one LED indicator light C, and depending on the operation mode of the LED indicator lamp C, the ordinary symbol is changed and stopped. As the operation of the normal symbol display unit 59, it is possible to distinguish and display a large number (for example, 3 or more) types of information depending on the difference in lighting and blinking, the difference in blinking cycle, and the like. From the viewpoint of clarity related to the stop display of the normal symbol, it is desirable to display the lottery result related to the normal symbol by turning it on or off. Therefore, the number of LED indicator lamps constituting the normal symbol display unit 59 may be set to, for example, two or more, and the stop symbol of the normal symbol may be represented by the combination of turning on and off.

The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of variable display and stop display of the first special symbol related to the first game depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights G to N arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. It has become. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 62, and the variable display is predetermined. When stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. The first special symbol display unit 70 has a maximum of 256 (= 2 ^ 8) types depending on the combination of turning on and off the LED indicator lights G to N when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Identification information can be displayed.

Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 71 described above displays up to 256 (= 2 ^ 8) types of identification information depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights Q to X arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control display device 53 having such a configuration is electrically connected to the main board 102 described above. Then, various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In addition, in FIG. 3, among various display units in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<< Functions of main control display device >>

When the game ball passes through the above-mentioned operating port (left operating port 68a or right operating port 68b), the normal symbol display unit 59 blinks, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) elapses after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in the out-of-order mode (out-of-shape mode), it is normal if the ball enters the subsequent operating port after the lapse of a predetermined stop time (normal figure stop fixed time). The next variation display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (hit mode), the process shifts to the next variable display as in the case of the loss, while the hit of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed earlier is displayed. Depending on the aspect, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

In addition, the first LED for normal symbol memory display and the second LED for normal symbol memory display, which are LED indicator lights A and B, form a set of two, and the combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking the two LEDs Numerical values from 0 to 4 can be displayed.

The number of holdings related to this normal symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the left operating port 68a (or the right operating port 68b) during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the variation display of the normal symbol has not yet been executed. Shows the number of lottery. That is, if the symbol change that has been performed earlier is not completed, the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied, and if the symbol change is completed, the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the lottery result stored on hold ( Based on the pending lottery result), a new symbol change will be started. The upper limit of the number of holdings is 4, and the holding storage is not performed in excess of 4.

The display of numerical values from 0 to 4 by the first LED (A) for normal symbol memory display and the second LED (B) for normal symbol memory display is, for example, turned off when the number of holds is 0 (no hold). However, when the number of holds is 1, it is possible to turn on one of them and turn off the other. Further, when the number of holds is 2, both are lit, when the number of holds is 3, one of them is lit and the other is blinked, and when the number of holds is 4, both are blinked. It is possible to display.

Regarding the display of the number of reserved 1st special symbols by the 1st special symbol display unit 70 described above, there are two LEDs (O) for storing the first special symbol and a second LED (P) for storing the first special symbol. Is set as one set, and a numerical value of 0 to 4 is displayed. Regarding the display of the reserved number of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 71, the first LED (Y) for the second special symbol storage display and the second LED (Z) for the second special symbol storage display are used as one. This is done by displaying a numerical value from 0 to 4 as a set.

The first LED (O) for the first special symbol memory display and the second LED (P) for the first special symbol memory display, or the first LED (Y) for the second special symbol memory display and the second LED for the second special symbol memory display. The display of the numerical values from 0 to 4 by (Z) is, for example, the display of the number of pending numbers in the same manner as in the case of the first LED (A) for normal symbol storage display and the second LED (B) for normal symbol storage display described above. It is possible to do.

When the game situation in which the right-handed hit should be performed is reached, the display is performed in a predetermined mode using the right-handed indicator light F of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A). In this embodiment, the right-handed indicator light F is set to be turned off at the time of left-handed hitting, which is a game situation to be left-handed, and to be turned on at the time of right-handed, which is a game situation to be right-handed.
<Structure of production display device and basic display contents>

Subsequently, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as an effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the main control display device 53, a story display, and the like are performed. A variety of images are displayed on the effect display device 60, and here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 displays the effect as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B. A variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the symbol 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect symbol 190 is composed of the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c. In the following, the left, middle, and right effects symbols 190a to 190c may be described as "effect symbols 190" or "effect symbols 190a to 190c" depending on the situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 has seven types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "7". The details of the above-mentioned element symbols will be described later. In addition, here, in order not to complicate the explanation, the explanation is given using seven types of element symbols having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "7". The element symbols include, for example, a predetermined word. It is also possible to adopt a symbol that has a meaning other than numbers, such as. Further, as an element symbol, it is possible to use a number having a meaning and another meaning. In addition, in order to execute a special effect (pseudo continuous notice or special zone effect described later), an effect suggestion that appears (displayed by being added to or replaced with a normal symbol) only at a certain fluctuation is performed. In a broad sense, the special symbol for the purpose is also included in the production symbol 190.

With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 7A). In the variable display of the effect symbols, in the present embodiment, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertically scrolled), and the above-mentioned element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Is executed by. As the scroll direction of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, various modes such as a horizontal direction, a rotation, and a turn can be adopted in addition to the vertical direction, and various modes of the scroll display will be described later. To do.

Further, the effect symbol 190 may form a so-called "reach" combination as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) have the same number, such as "7" and "7", and have the same meaning. Alternatively, the combination is composed of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that compose the reach combination is in a change that cannot form a combination with other effect symbols. It has become.

As the display mode of the effect symbol 190, many types of "reach" and various other types can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect symbol 190 are performed, and the details thereof will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be a thing. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to the one provided with only one display body, and may be composed of a combination of a plurality of display bodies by adding, for example, an additional display body.

Further, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and to form a gimmick by the additional display body. Then, usually, an additional display body is arranged avoiding the outside of the display area 194 so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194. The specific mode of the effect using the additional display body will be described later.
<Electrical configuration of Pachinko game machine>

Next, the electrical configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described, but here, the main electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Of these, the above-mentioned payout control board 103 and the like are connected to the power supply board 251, and the main board 102, the launching device 43, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown) are connected to the payout control board 103. ) Etc. are connected. Further, the main control display device 53 and the sub-main board 301 are connected to the main board 102, and the sub-sub board 302 is connected to the sub-main board 301.

The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2) described above. Further, although not shown, the payout control board 103 is also connected to a status display unit used for displaying an error type and a card unit for executing monetary processing and ball lending processing related to ball lending. .. Further, a ball coin operation board or the like used for ball coin operation is connected to the above-mentioned game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown). Further, a touch switch (not shown), a launch stop switch (not shown), and the like provided on the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1) are connected to the launch device 43 described above.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 102 is connected to the main control display device 53, the passage detection devices 69a and 69b, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 76, and the first one via various game board connection boards (not shown). Start winning prize detection device 74, 2nd start prize detection device 75, general prize detection device 73, 1st prize detection device 78, 2nd prize detection device 79, 1st prize opening solenoid 80, 2nd prize opening solenoid 81, a magnetic sensor, a solenoid sensor (not shown), and the like are connected.

Each device for production is connected to the sub-main board 301 via various relay boards (not shown). Examples of the production devices include LED boards for various lighting in the center decoration 64, various movable motors of the movable production members 93 and 94, LED boards for lighting in the game machine frame 11, and the game machine frame 11. An example of a frame motor for production provided can be exemplified. Here, examples of the illumination in the game machine frame 11 include those performed by the glass door 15 described above, those performed by the plate unit 16, and those performed by a button device provided with the operation buttons 22. .. Further, the above-mentioned frame motor is used for driving a movable effect member (not shown) provided in the game machine frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 4, the sub-sub board 302 is connected to the liquid crystal unit 42 provided in the above-mentioned effect display device 60, various speakers 21, and the like. The various speakers 21 may be connected to the above-mentioned sub-main board 301.

Subsequently, the configurations of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Of these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. The "ROM" and "RWM" described in this embodiment are comprehensive concepts including both those built in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

Further, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a 16-bit random number circuit, and an 8-bit random number are included. It is equipped with a random number circuit for. Of these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers, which are built-in random numbers.

Further, the main board 102 is equipped with an input / output port 505 that inputs / outputs data to / from an external device of the main board 102. Further, although not shown, various circuit parts such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

The ROM 502 described above stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to the game, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 503 rewritably stores data required for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the game program is executed by the CPU 501.

Subsequently, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted on the payout control board 103. Of these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. Further, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform a process related to the payout, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 513 rewritably stores data required for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501.

The above-mentioned sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. .. The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, ROM 522, work RWM 523, output port 528, and the like are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

The CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (command) for displaying the symbol transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RWM523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Memory.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 described above is performed in the form of one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub-main board 301.

The sub-sub board 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a sound ROM 534, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, a sound control circuit 537, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). It has. Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The output side of the sub-main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and each device such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533 is connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The video memory 540 described above is a memory for storing display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and by rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540, the display content (frame image) of the effect display device 60 is used. ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Further, the symbols are superimposed in the order of the layers in which the priority is determined in advance and displayed on the effect display device 60.
<Power supply and data backup>

The power supply board 251 described above includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko game machine 10, and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 applies a predetermined amount of voltage to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, etc. for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc. through a power supply path (not shown) to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. It supplies 103 and other predetermined devices.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 includes a circuit that outputs an initialization signal for clearing backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the initialization switch 544 is pressed when the power is turned on. ..

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is capable of holding (backing up) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 503a can be used as a stack pointer at the time of power failure when the power is cut off (when a power failure occurs) due to a power failure (including a so-called momentary power failure due to a momentary voltage drop). , Each register, an area for storing the values of I / O and the like. Then, when the normal power supply is started up or the power failure is resolved, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power supply is cut off based on the information in the backup area 503a.

Further, with respect to the RWM 513 on the payout control board 103, similarly to the RWM 503 on the main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off so that data can be retained (backed up). It has become.

The main board 102 described above is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure or the like as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the DC stable (for example, 30 volt) voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251. When this voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage, a power failure (power supply) occurs. The occurrence of cutoff) is detected and the above-mentioned power failure signal is output. Based on the input of such a power cut signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power cut process.

Next, the basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of this embodiment fulfills various functions such as ball entry determination, lottery, and command transmission by the functions of the above-described configurations (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 5 shows typical functional means in each of the main board 102, the sub-main board 301, and the sub-sub board 302. Of these, the main board 102 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a first lottery means 111, a second lottery means 112, a general drawing lottery means 113, a hold control means 114, a main display control means 115, and a special game control means 116. It includes specific game control means 117, open / close control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like. Then, the main board 102 uses these functional means to draw a lottery for a special symbol, a lottery for a normal symbol, hold control, a main control display, a special game, a specific game, an open / close control, and prior information, as described in order below. Execute notification etc.

The above-mentioned winning ball determination means 110 allows the entry of a game ball into each winning opening (each operating opening, various starting winning openings, various large winning openings, general winning openings, etc.) from sensors provided at each winning opening. Judgment is made based on the output signal.
<< Win / Loss Lottery Function for Special Designs >>

The first lottery means 111 described above executes the first lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning opening 62. The first lottery means 111 has the functions of the first lottery value acquisition means 121, the first hit / fail determination means 122, the first symbol determination means 123, and the first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A) described above.

Similarly, the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of the second lottery value acquisition means 125, the second winning / failing determination means 126, the second symbol determination means 127, and the second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 described above sets the value of the big hit random number related to the first lottery as the first winning / failing lottery value when the ball enters the first starting winning opening 62. Get as. Further, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 sets the value of the jackpot random number related to the second lottery to the second winning or failing when the ball enters the second starting winning opening 63. Obtained as a lottery value.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first winning / failing lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second winning / failing lottery value are a hardware random number (hard random number) and a software random number (soft random number). It is generated by the calculation (addition) used. As the hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a random number circuit for 16 bits is used, and as the software random number, a value updated for each interrupt by a random number generation program in software is used. In addition, either one of the hardware random number and the software random number may be used.

The first winning / failing determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a winning / failing determination based on the first winning / failing lottery value, and whether or not the first winning / failing lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (winning value) to be a hit. To judge. Similarly, the second winning / failing determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 makes a winning / failing determination based on the above-mentioned second winning / failing lottery value, and the second winning / failing lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value) to be a hit. Judge whether it is applicable or not. In the winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 122 and the second winning / failing determination means 126, the winning / failing determination table that defines the correspondence between the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value and the lottery result of the big hit lottery (FIG. ) Is used. Here, the big hit at the time of normal probability change shown in FIG. 8A indicates a random number value range that is always a big hit, and the big hit at the time of probability change is a random value range that becomes a big hit only at the time of probability change. It is shown that.

When the first symbol determining means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determining means 127 in the second lottery means 112 win either the jackpot in the jackpot lottery relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , The type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 9). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number value (symbol random number) related to the symbol determination, and the type of the special symbol.

Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as a "symbol random number per special symbol" or a "symbol random number" related to the special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of hit includes a small hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 are special in the case where the small hit is won in the big hit lottery related to the special symbol. The type of symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C).

The symbol lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening, as in the case of the winning / failing lottery value described above. In addition, the types of special symbols are associated with the types of hits, and the types of big hits and the presence or absence of small hits are determined in association with the acquired symbol lottery value.

The first pattern determining means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determining means 128 in the second lottery means 112 determine the variation pattern of the special symbol in the corresponding special symbol display unit based on the special symbol variation pattern table. decide. The special figure fluctuation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special figure fluctuation patterns and a pattern lottery value which is a random number value (variation pattern random number) related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

The pattern lottery value, like the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery value, is acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening. Further, the fluctuation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol correspond to various game situations such as, for example, at the time of big hit, at the time of miss, presence / absence of reach, presence / absence of time reduction, number of holdings, number of fluctuations after big hit, and the like. A plurality of different special figure fluctuation pattern tables are provided.

The fluctuation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol fluctuation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the start to the stop of the fluctuation in the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern defines various fluctuation times, long and short, depending on the type, for example, from 1 second or less to several tens of seconds. That is, in each special symbol fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time is set as an end condition of the fluctuation display, and in the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 or second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 6A). Is started to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, and when the specified fluctuation time elapses, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

For most of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation pattern to be selected when the time is short. However, the special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the case of non-time saving and when the number of holdings is 4, include those having a shorter fluctuation time than the specific special figure fluctuation pattern in the time saving. There is.

Further, in this embodiment, most of the fluctuation patterns selected in a predetermined situation such as a probability change have an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). Then, in such a situation, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the effect associated therewith are executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the extremely short time. The effect based on the fluctuation pattern of such an extremely short fluctuation time will be described later.
<< Various lottery functions related to ordinary symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The general map lottery means 113 includes a general map lottery value acquisition unit 129, a general map winning / failing determination means 130, a general map symbol determination means 131, and a general map pattern determination means 132. Then, when the passage of the game ball at each of the operating ports 68a and 68b is detected by the above-mentioned entry determination means 110, the general drawing lottery means 113 draws a lottery related to the normal symbol (general drawing lottery) based on the detection result. ) Is executed.

In this general drawing lottery, the general symbol lottery value acquisition means 129 acquires the general symbol lottery value which is a random number related to the normal symbol (the general symbol random number), and the general symbol determination means 131 causes the general symbol determination table. Seen. In this normal figure determination table, the correspondence between the normal figure lottery value and the type of the normal symbol is defined. Then, the normal figure winning / failing determination means 130 determines whether or not the normal symbol associated with the normal figure lottery value corresponds to a hit, and if it corresponds to a hit, the type of hit is determined. Will be done.

In addition, the normal pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the left operating port 68a or the right operating port 68b, and the acquired normal map pattern lottery value is used to change the normal symbol by the normal map pattern determining means 132. The pattern (normal map fluctuation pattern) is determined. Each normal figure fluctuation pattern corresponds to the normal figure pattern lottery value which is a random number related to the normal figure fluctuation pattern (random number of the normal figure fluctuation pattern), and is linked to the acquired normal figure pattern lottery value, and the situation of the game. The pattern of fluctuations in the normal map is determined according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, the normal figure lottery value, which is a random number related to the ordinary symbol, and the normal figure pattern lottery value are created by using only software random numbers.
<< Functions related to holding special symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned hold control means 114 will be described. The hold control means 114 has a first hold means 133, a second hold means 134, and a normal figure hold means 135. Of these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering a ball when a new entry into the first start winning opening 62 does not satisfy the predetermined variation start condition related to the first special symbol. Information (first special figure hold storage information) related to various random numbers (first winning / failing lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored. In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the first special symbol is set to 4, and the hold related to the first special symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was executed when the above-mentioned ball was entered is completed, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol that occurred before the above-mentioned entry is further completed. If there is no hold related to, the change start condition related to the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol change related to the first special symbol is permitted.

The above-mentioned second holding means 134 is also acquired by entering the ball if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the second special symbol is not satisfied when the ball is newly entered into the second starting winning opening 63. Information related to various random numbers (second winning / failing lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored.

When the change display of the second special symbol, which was executed when the ball was entered, is completed, the change start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied, and the new symbol change for the second special symbol is satisfied. Will be allowed. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four as in the case of the first special symbol.

In the above-mentioned first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and controlled by the special game, the fluctuation start condition is determined after the special game is completed.
<< Functions related to holding ordinary symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general drawing holding means 135 will be described. The normal figure holding means 135 is a random number (normal) acquired by entering a ball if a predetermined fluctuation start condition related to a normal symbol is not satisfied when a ball is entered at the operating ports 68a and 68b (see FIG. 1). Information related to (drawing lottery value, etc.) (general figure holding storage information) is temporarily held and stored. Then, until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol related to the above-mentioned entry is not permitted. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the hold related to the normal symbol is set to 4, and the hold related to the normal symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, which was executed when the ball was entered, is completed and the normal electric accessory is not operating, the fluctuation start condition related to the normal symbol is satisfied, and the new normal symbol is related. It will be allowed to change the design.
<< Functions related to main control display >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 includes a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a normal figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Of these, the first special symbol control means 136 is the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 6A) according to the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111. A variable display of the symbol (for example, a blinking display in which the LED indicators M and N blink every 100 msec) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the first special symbol display unit 70.

Further, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol control means 137 follows the fluctuation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, and the second special symbol display unit 71 ( (See FIG. 6A), the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the second special symbol display unit 71.

Further, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is satisfied, the ordinary symbol control means 138 follows the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol determined by the ordinary symbol lottery means 113, and the ordinary symbol display unit 59 (FIG. 6 (FIG. 6) In (a)), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed. Further, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the normal symbol display unit 59.

Further, the hold display control means 139 displays the number of holds related to the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, and ordinary symbol. The display of the number of reserved numbers is displayed by the first special symbol storage display unit (LED indicator lights O, P) and the second special symbol storage display unit (LED display) of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. 6A. Lights Y and Z) and ordinary symbol memory display units (LED display lights C and D) are used. In addition, the above-mentioned other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol, and various hold displays.
<< Functions related to special games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be described. When the special game control means 116 hits a big hit and the special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode, it determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and as described above, the special game control means 116 determines a predetermined value according to the type of the big hit. A special game to be opened is executed in a mode (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of a large winning opening during a unit game).
<< Functions related to specific games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 controls the above-mentioned probability change, time reduction, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probability change state, a time saving state, or the like according to the type of big hit. The probabilistic state is not associated with all types of jackpots, but with some types of jackpots. Furthermore, for some jackpots, the probability change state continues until the next jackpot, and for other jackpots with probability changes, it continues until the total number of variable display times after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). .. During the probability change state, the jackpot winning probability by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than in the normal time, which is the non-probability change time.

Further, the time saving state is continued until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of end condition times (for example, 100 times) counting from the end time of the special game. Further, during the time reduction, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 use the variation pattern for the time reduction so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is substantially shorter than the normal state. Select.

Further, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game is executed according to the time reduction as the specific game, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is facilitated, and the ball is placed at the entrance of the second start winning opening. The opening / closing blades can be easily opened. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing blade is controlled by the opening / closing control means 118 described later.
<< Functions related to open / close control >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory (opening / closing blade) of the second starting winning opening 63, the first special winning opening 91, and the second special winning opening 92. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 76 to open the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 controls to send an opening instruction to the first special winning opening solenoid 80 and the second special winning opening solenoid 81 in the special game, and controls the first special winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening. Open 92.
<< Functions related to advance information notification >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned advance information notification means 119 will be described. The advance information notification means 119 is acquired when a ball is entered in the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63, regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the entry is suspended. The processing for transmitting the information related to the various random value values to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) as advance notification information is performed.

As the above-mentioned advance notification information, each of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery values (first winning / failing lottery value or second winning / failing lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), and each pattern Information such as what kind of winning / failing range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to can be exemplified.

By transmitting such advance notification information, various pre-reading effects can be performed on the sub-board 104 side. As the look-ahead effect, a hold notice, a continuous notice, and the like can be exemplified, and details of these will be described later.
<< Functions related to command transmission >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main command transmitting means 120 will be described. The main command transmitting means 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 includes various information at various timings such as when the start prize is won, when the special symbol changes start, when the special symbol changes stop, and when a big hit occurs. ..
<Basic functions of sub-board>

Next, the basic functions of the above-mentioned sub-board 104 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and fulfills various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-main board 301 includes a main command receiving means 141, an effect pattern determining means 142, a sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling the speaker output and the like, and an optical control means 145 for controlling the game effect lamp output and the like.

The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information for designating the display effect displayed on the effect display device 60, and the sound effect and the light effect to be performed together with the display effect as needed. During the variable display of the symbol 190, an effect suggesting a high degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. Here, the "expectation level" in this embodiment can be rephrased as the "reliability level". In the following, "expectation level" describes the production stage (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, confirmed pattern) that raises the expectation that it will be a big hit due to fluctuations when it appears among the same type of advance notice production patterns, and one production. About the probability that the hit fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the effect of 1 when the hit fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in hit fluctuation) information and the deviation fluctuation pattern information (variation pattern in loss fluctuation) are confirmed. It may be used for each of the descriptions of what is described, and in general, "highly expected production" refers to a production that is often a big hit when the production occurs.

When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means 142, the effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmission means 143. Further, the command transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 includes sound information and the like in order to read sound data, lamp data, and the like from the ROM of the sub-sub board.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 to form an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays the moving image for the effect.
<Example of specific mode related to specific game>

Next, a specific mode of the above-mentioned specific game will be described. As described above, as the specific game, the special symbol probability fluctuation function (probability variation), the special symbol variation time shortening function (time reduction), and the ball entry facilitation game (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction) A combination of functions and open extension functions for ordinary electric accessories) is provided. Then, at least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the big hit lottery (stop display symbol of the special symbol) or the game result during the big hit. In this embodiment, instead of the so-called ST machine described above, a specification is adopted in which the probability variation period continues until the next big hit in some big hits, but a specific embodiment thereof will be described later.
<< Probability fluctuation game >>

The above-mentioned probability change changes the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after the big hit so that the probability of occurrence of the big hit is higher than that of the normal probability state. In the pachinko game machine that adopts ST, the duration of the probabilistic state (probability change period) is determined based on the number of changes of the special symbol.

The number of fluctuations of the special symbol is determined as one from the variation display of the special symbol to the stop display. Then, in the ST, in the probability variation period, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this way, the function that allows the probability variation period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as ST or the number-cut probability variation.
<< Game for shortening fluctuation time >>

The above-mentioned time reduction substantially shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 as compared with the case of the normal game. Here, "generally shortening" does not mean that the game is shortened in all cases, and in some cases, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is equivalent to that of the normal game or longer than that of the normal game. It means that it can include. Then, according to this time reduction, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63) is continuously won, it is special. It is possible to smoothly advance the variable display and the stop display of the symbol at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for the big hit lottery.

Further, the duration of the time saving state (time saving period) is determined based on the number of changes of the special symbol, as in the probability change state. Then, in this embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the above example, the probability variation period and the time reduction period are set to the same period, but the probability variation period and the time reduction period may be different from each other. For example, the probability variation period can be set to 104 times, and the time saving period can be set to 100 times. Moreover, the probability change period and the time reduction period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be set to any of 4, 25, 100, and the like depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. Further, the time saving period can be set to any one of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred.

Further, it is possible to provide a so-called fall lottery function. The following can be exemplified as this fall lottery. For example, after the probability variation or time reduction reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the above-mentioned maximum number of fluctuations (here, 100 times), each change of the special symbol is performed until the maximum number of fluctuations is reached. A lottery (lottery to end a specific game) is executed to determine whether or not to end the probability change and time reduction. Then, when the specific game end lottery is won, the probability change and the time reduction are ended, and the game state from the next fluctuation returns to the normal state without the probability change and the time reduction.

Further, it is possible not only to execute both the probability change and the time saving, but also to execute only one of them in the specific game. For example, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, it is possible to give only the time reduction and not the probability change, or to not give the time reduction and give only the probability change.
<< Game to facilitate ball entry >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game will be described. In this ball entry facilitation game, the function related to the ordinary electric accessory is set in the player's favor, and the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 can be easier to accept the game ball than usual. is there. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the second is determined by control modes such as time reduction related to the normal symbol, probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol, opening extension related to the normal electric accessory, and a combination of these control modes. The ease of entering the ball into the starting winning opening 63 is enhanced, and a state in which the ball is easily entered is formed.

Among the various control modes described above in the normal symbol, the time reduction related to the normal symbol is a control mode in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol is the winning probability of the normal symbol. Is a control mode (probability change related to a normal symbol) that improves the value from the normal state. Further, the opening extension related to the ordinary electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second start winning opening 63 is opened (long opening) longer than the opening (short opening) in the normal time (during a non-specific game). is there.

As described above, the ball entry facilitation game during the specific game uses the three functions of shortening the time of the normal symbol, changing the probability of the open lottery, and extending the opening of the normal electric accessory to enter the second start winning opening 63. Increase ball ease. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to enhance the ease of entering the second starting winning opening 63. Further, at least one of the three functions may be switched between the period in which the function is performed and the period in which the function is not performed, depending on the game state.

The duration of such a ball-enhancing game can be determined based on a short period of time related to the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the ball entry facilitation game is continued during the time reduction related to the special symbol, and the ball entry facilitation game ends when the time reduction related to the special symbol is completed. Then, in this case, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) in which the symbol variation is started after the time reduction of the special symbol is completed is provided for the normal time (during non-specific game). It is possible to make it determined from the fluctuation patterns.
<Main production in Pachinko game machine>
<< Basic display mode of production pattern >>

Next, various effects executed by the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub-board 302 based on the command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. Then, here, first, the basic display mode of the said effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) will be described.

The effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 7B) as the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53.

The stop symbol displayed when the effect symbol 190 is stopped is composed of a combination of three symbols, the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is a big hit, a combination of three doublets, such as "777" and "555", is used as a stop symbol representing the big hit. Is displayed. If the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, one or all of the production symbols may be different from the other production symbols, such as "767", "928", and "331". The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

Here, the "stop symbol" and "stop symbol" in the present embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are "fixed stop". That is, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 while maintaining a combination of, for example, "767" and "928", that alone is "fixed stop". It does not correspond to what you did. Then, the state in which the effect symbol 190 has not reached the "fixed stop" while maintaining the combination can be referred to as the "temporary stop" state.

As a display mode of such "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect symbol 190 vibrates (sways) in small steps can be exemplified. Then, a mode of temporary stop in which the effect symbol 190 sways in small steps while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a mode of "sway fluctuation" or the like. Examples of the swaying mode of the effect symbol 190 in this "temporary stop" include vertical or horizontal linear movement and horizontal rotational movement, and the movement range may be about several millimeters.

Further, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "fixed stop", a state in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination can be exemplified after the temporary stop state. Further, at the time of this "fixed stop", it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the fixed stop has been performed. Then, as an effect indicating that the confirmed display has been performed, the fixed stop state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), and the fixed and stopped effect symbols 190a to 190c are in a state in which a special effect is added. It can be illustrated that it is displayed with (design effect).

Here, as a symbol effect, each effect symbol 190a to 190c is illuminated only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), and a bright spot is made to circulate around each effect symbol 190a to 190c once or a plurality of times. It is possible to adopt various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c, moving the effect symbols 190a to 190c by about several millimeters, and returning them to their original positions.

Further, in the above-mentioned "reach" display mode, the effect symbol that maintains the combination of reach may be displayed in the above-mentioned "temporary stop" mode. Then, after the reach display by this "temporary stop", the symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) that has been variablely displayed constitutes an out-of-order combination (out-of-reach combination) and "temporarily stops" to perform the combination. It is possible to exemplify an effect such that "fixed stop" is performed and the variable display ends while maintaining the effect. Further, from the state where the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are "temporarily stopped" by the combination of the detached reach, the middle effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation and the reach effect is highly reliable (reliability related to the jackpot). It can also be illustrated as a production (second half reach) that develops into something with a relatively high degree.

The scroll display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the above-mentioned vertical scrolling, and various display modes can be adopted. Then, as another display mode, for example, a side-scrolling mode in the horizontal direction (right to left, etc.) or a left effect symbol 190a to a right effect symbol 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around the vertical axis. , An example of a rotation mode in which a variable display is performed. Further, for example, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are enlarged in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back to the front of the screen along a straight or curved (turning) trajectory. A display mode such as sequential feeding can also be exemplified. Further, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect symbol from the rear to the front descends from the upper side to the lower front side.

Further, the scrolling mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes as described above, and for example, when a predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined scrolling mode is switched to another scrolling mode. It is also possible. Further, for a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to make the scroll mode different for each effect mode.

Further, in FIGS. 7A and 7B, a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle stage in the vertical direction of the display area 194 is exemplified, and the effective line is in the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, and for example, the number of effective lines can be set to 2 or 5.

Further, in FIG. 7B, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are simplified and shown only by the numbers in the predetermined font, but the effect symbol 190 means a predetermined symbol such as a number. It can be configured by a combination of a portion (element symbol which is the above-mentioned symbol element effect symbol) and a portion (element symbol which is a non-symbol element effect symbol) representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol. As a part consisting of a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol, various design drawings and portraits, and combinations thereof can be exemplified, and various design drawings and portraits combined with the symbol can be shown as a moving image. It is also possible to.
<< Example of production pattern >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned production pattern will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the variation pattern determined by the main board 102. Further, the effect pattern defines a mode of effect including the effect symbol 190. More specifically, the effect pattern defines an effect process such as a change process from the start of change to the stop of the change for the selected effect symbol 190, a background displayed in combination with the effect symbol 190, and story development. There is. And, there are some production patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Of these, when the effect pattern of "with reach" is executed, the effect display device 60 performs a reach effect that becomes a big hit if one more effect symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) is prepared. Then, when the result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the special symbol is a big hit, the doublet display such as "777" or "333" according to the type of the big hit is performed by the effect symbol 190 whose confirmation has been stopped. Further, when the result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the special symbol is out of order, for example, a combination indicating the out of place such as "767" or "515" is performed by the effect symbol 190 which has been confirmed and stopped.

Further, when the "no reach" effect pattern is executed, a non-reach combination in which the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c are not a reach combination, such as "928" and "331", is used. It is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been fixed and stopped.

Some of these production patterns have various long and short fluctuation times, and in particular, the fluctuation pattern of "with reach" includes a fluctuation time of several minutes. In this embodiment, "no reach (about 3 to 10 seconds)" and "normal reach (10 to 20 seconds)" in the fluctuation pattern related to the above-mentioned special symbol (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c)). Degree) ”and“ Super reach (reach with high reliability of big hits) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes) ”are provided with a non-reach effect pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, and a super reach effect pattern. Then, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern in these effect patterns, and the number of effect patterns is wider than that of the above-mentioned variation pattern. Further, "super reach" can be paraphrased as "SP (special) reach".
<< Hold effect display related to special symbols >>

Next, the hold display (hold effect display) related to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. At the bottom of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b), a first hold number display unit 196 showing the number of hold of the winning / losing lottery value in the first game, and a first The second hold number display unit 197 indicating the hold number of the winning / losing lottery value in the two games is displayed. In addition, although each hold display is represented by a perfect circle here for the sake of simplification of description and illustration, the hold display may be performed by other combinations of shapes and colors, character images, animations, and the like.

In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the first hold number display unit 196 described above. Furthermore, as the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the number of holds reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 7A, four hold displays are performed in the first hold number display unit 196.

Further, the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the rightmost portion of the first hold number display unit 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, in the following, the hold display performed from the first display position to the fourth display position will be referred to as "ho 1", "ho 2", "ho 3", and "ho 4", respectively.

For example, in the effect display device 60, a hold occurs while the effect symbol 190 related to the first game is being performed and one hold display is not performed on the first hold number display unit 196. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position at the right end (the position of "holding 1" described above). Then, at this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and that "Ho 2" to "Ho 4" have not occurred. If a hold is further generated in the situation where the "hold 1" is generated in this way, the display related to the held hold is performed at the position of the "hold 2" to the left of the "hold 1". Then, when "Ho 1" and "Ho 2" are displayed and "Ho 3" and "Ho 4" are not displayed and a further hold occurs, "Ho 3" is displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. And "Ho 4" are displayed.

Then, if the variation display executed when the "protection 1" occurs is completed and the other variation start conditions related to the first game are also satisfied, the reserved storage information related to the above-mentioned "protection 1" is stored. At the stage of being digested, the hold display of "Take 1" moves to the right side of the first hold number display unit 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is provided on the right side portion of the first reserved number display unit 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (the fluctuation information) related to the fluctuation display being executed at that time. That is, the hold display of "Holding 1" moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

Here, when moving the hold display of "Ho 1" to the fluctuation information display unit 195, the display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the examples of FIGS. 7A and 7B, the size is increased when the hold display of "Maintenance 1" is changed to the fluctuation information display 198.

When the hold display in the “hold 1” is moved to the fluctuation information display unit 195 as described above, the standby order of the subsequent hold display is moved up, and the “hold 2” is shifted to the position of the “hold 1”. Further, when "Ho 3" and "Ho 4" are present, "Ho 3" shifts to the position of "Ho 2" and "Ho 4" shifts to the position of "Ho 3". Then, if a further hold occurs in such a situation, a new "hold 4" is generated, and the number of holds reaches the upper limit. Further, if a new hold does not occur, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is raised.

In a broad sense, it can be regarded as a hold effect, including a state in which the hold display in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195. Not limited to this, the hold display in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is set as the hold display, and the state changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display. It is also possible.

In addition, if the variation display related to the effect symbol 190 is not performed and the number of holdings is 0 and there is a ball in the first start winning opening 62, the display of "ho 1" is not performed and the variation information. The fluctuation information display 198 is directly performed on the display unit 195. Then, only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

Subsequently, the above-mentioned second hold number display unit 197 will be described, but the same points as the first hold number display unit 196 will be omitted. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second reserved number display unit 197 is located on the opposite side of the first reserved number display unit 196 (on the right side when viewed from the player) with the above-mentioned fluctuation information display unit 195 sandwiched. ), It is arranged so that the relationship of "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is targeted in a color different from that of the first reserved image.

In addition, the hold display can be performed in various modes according to the gaming state. For example, when the probability of the big hit lottery is a normal probability and a high probability, and when they are controlled to different production modes, the mode of holding display may be different from each other.

Further, the positional relationship between the first reserved number display unit 196, the second reserved number display unit 197, and the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above, and the second game is performed as in the present embodiment. The variation information display unit is used for a pachinko game machine of a type that displays variations of special symbols and effect symbols 190 in the order in which starting prizes related to the first game and the second game occur, instead of executing the game with priority given to one game. Eight hold displays may be arranged on the left side of 195.
<< Hold look-ahead effect related to special symbols >>

Next, a hold look-ahead effect, which is one of the advance notice effects (look-ahead effects) related to the special symbol, will be described. This hold look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the above-mentioned hold storage information (first special figure hold storage information or second hold storage information). Further, in the hold look-ahead effect, a reach or a big hit occurs for a hold that is digested after the effect performed by using the effect symbol 190 or the like at that time by using the above-mentioned advance information notification function. It is executed as a production that suggests the expectation of doing.

For example, the hold display generated at the position of "hold 3" in the first hold number display unit 196 described above is different from the display (for example, blue) which is the basic display mode described above, and the hold display is performed in green. , It is shown that the degree of expectation such as the occurrence of reach is higher than in the case of the normal blue mode. Then, in addition to the coloring of blue and green, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined pattern are provided, and the expectation of a big hit in the order of yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined pattern rather than green. The production is such that it shows that the degree is high.

Here, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern", an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like can be exemplified. In addition to the coloring and pattern of the hold display, it is also possible to adopt items other than a perfect circle, a person image, and the like. Further, it is also possible to perform a look-ahead effect by combining the above-mentioned various display modes with a mode in which blinking or light emission is performed. Further, the hold that hits the look-ahead effect including the hold look-ahead effect can be referred to as, for example, "trigger hold".

The look-ahead effect related to the hold as described above may also be performed in the second game. Then, with respect to the second game, in addition to the basic color (orange), it is possible to provide display modes such as red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern. Further, as the hold display related to the second game, it is also possible to adopt an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image, or the like.

Further, the look-ahead effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as "hold change" or the like. Then, such "hold change" includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold occurrence, a display mode change at the timing after the hold occurrence, and the like. is there.

Among these, as those indicating the change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, for example, the hold occurs, the hold display is started, the hold is digested, and the hold display is, for example, "Hold 2". For example, the hold display changes while proceeding to "Take 1". Then, for example, when the hold occurs, the hold is displayed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of "hold 3", and when the hold is moved to the position of "hold 1", another color such as green is displayed. And so on.

Further, in both the first game and the second game, when the fluctuation information display 198 is displayed, the hold display is changed from the basic color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow color, a predetermined pattern, or true. It may change to a display mode such as an item other than a circular shape or a person image to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, as the control mode related to the pending change as described above, the following can be exemplified. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) is performed to determine an effect pattern (hold change pattern) of the hold change. A hold change pattern table is used for this hold change pattern lottery, and in this hold change pattern table, there is a hold change, and when a hold change is executed (when there is a hold change), what kind of timing is used? Matters related to the determination of the effect pattern, such as what kind of display mode is to be executed, are stipulated. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

Further, when there are a plurality of holds that have hit the hold change in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4", it is possible to cancel one of the hold look-ahead effects. More specifically, for example, when "Ho 4" occurs, the hold related to "Ho 4" hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any hold that has occurred earlier is As long as the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color is applied, the hold related to the above-mentioned "ho 4" can be exemplified by canceling the hold change and not executing it.

Further, for example, when "Ho 4" occurs as in the above example, the hold related to "Ho 4" hits the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color, and all the holds that have occurred earlier. However, if the hold does not change up to the rainbow color and only changes to green, etc., the hold change that has occurred earlier can be canceled and not executed.
<< Continuous notice of special symbols >>

Next, as another pattern of the look-ahead effect, continuous notice (continuous effect) related to the special symbol will be described. There are genuine and pseudo continuous notices, and among these, the genuine continuous notice means that a continuous notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable displays related to a special symbol. ing. Further, the pseudo continuous advance notice means that an intermittent advance notice effect (pseudo continuous advance notice) as if there were a plurality of changes in the special symbol is performed for one variation display related to the special symbol.

As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, the characters who are the main characters in the story of the production move to different rooms in sequence aiming at the room that is the final goal for each change related to the special symbol. Such things can be exemplified. In addition, as another aspect of "continuous notice", the character who is the main character fights against a different enemy and wins for each change related to the special symbol, aiming for the final goal enemy. Can also be exemplified.

Further, the above-mentioned genuine continuous notice (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "continuous notice") can be performed based on the advance notification information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received when the hold of "Ho 3" occurs, the sub-main board 301 is used as an effect pattern corresponding to the variation display related to the subsequent special symbols. It is possible to select the content including the continuous notice over the three variable displays.

Then, when the hold for one time is exhausted and the hold of the above-mentioned "ho 3" is shifted to the position of "ho 2", the first one of the selected continuous notice-related production patterns The effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is sequentially digested and the hold display moves from "ho 2" to "ho 1", the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information is displayed from "ho 1". When moving to section 195, the final third notice is executed.

In addition, in the sub-main board 301, the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display executed at the time when the above-mentioned "holding 3" is held, and the "holding 2" or "holding 1" occurring before that. It is also possible to confirm the pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "ho 3" is held, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability is executed or a jackpot is generated among various information already stored. If there is information indicating that the item is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous advance notice selected when the hold of "Ho 3" occurs. In addition, depending on the degree of expectation of holding for "Ho 3", continuous notice is not given immediately from the next fluctuation, but after waiting for 1 change, the change of "Ho 1" and the trigger hold at the time of digestion, which is a look-ahead mode, 2 In some cases, it may be a continuous notice that spans fluctuations.

Further, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter, may be referred to as "pseudo continuous notice"), the reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern related to the one-time variable display of the special symbol. Such things, things in which the characters repeat actions multiple times, things in which the effect symbol 190 is temporarily stopped and re-variated, and the like can be exemplified.

The contents of the continuous notice as described above are merely examples, and various kinds of contents other than those described above can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<< Directed design related to normal design >>

Next, the production related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol will be described. In this embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect related to the ordinary symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Then, in the case of performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in this way, it is conceivable that the effect symbol is displayed to such an extent that, for example, the off-off and the hit type can be distinguished.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, it is provided with a relatively large display body and a display body smaller than this (may be a plurality of display bodies). It is possible. Then, a large display body can be referred to as, for example, a "main display body" or a "main liquid crystal", and a small display body can be referred to as, for example, a "sub display body" or a "sub liquid crystal". Further, when a relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect symbol (199) related to the normal symbol may be displayed on, for example, a small display body. Further, for example, an LED indicator lamp in which two sets may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device related to a normal symbol.

Further, when performing an effect using the effect symbol related to the normal symbol, the hold effect display related to the normal symbol can be performed as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is composed of a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect hold display related to a normal symbol is displayed, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator lamp in which two sets are provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, thereby displaying the number of pending effects related to the ordinary symbols "1" to "4". May be good.
<< Production related to limited frequency pattern >>

Next, the effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as "limited frequency pattern effect") will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the above-mentioned effect pattern. Further, the limited frequency effect pattern effect is an effect set so as to easily appear in a predetermined gaming state in response to a variation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content that shows a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific variation during a time-saving game, a predetermined variation pattern is used on the main board. It is possible to exemplify something that is determined and that always generates a highly reliable reach as a production.

In addition, as a game situation in which a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or a large hit without a ball), during a predetermined effect mode (probability change, (During the time saving game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, etc. can be exemplified. In addition to these, as a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, the number of holds related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4), or the hold is An example can be given when it does not exist. Further, in the situation where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, the limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and the effect pattern to be executed is selected from the limited frequency pattern defined in the limited frequency table. It is supposed to be selected.
<< Production using operation buttons >>

Next, an effect using the above-mentioned operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”) will be described. The operation button 22 is pressed and operated by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player the feeling that he / she is participating in the effect of the game or the winning / losing lottery. is there. As the button effect, for example, in the variable display process of the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b)), "Push" and "repeated hitting" are performed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 together with the symbol of the operation button 22. It is possible to exemplify the display of a guide prompting an operation, such as characters such as "Seyo" and "Press and hold", or a moving image of an indicator showing the remaining time.

Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the above-mentioned guide display, an effect in which the character makes a comment or an effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character can be exemplified. Further, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member 93 or the like is activated to notify that the reach is reached. Further, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect, and in such a case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member 93 or the like is activated to arouse expectations for a big hit.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally invalid, but the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button production. The button operation valid period is a preset fixed time.

It should be noted that the operation button 22 is combined with a vibration motor or a solenoid (not shown) to vibrate the operation button 22, or the operation range of the operation button 22 is expanded by using a drive source such as a motor to expand the operation button. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode such as sinking 22. Further, when the operation button 22 is recessed, the protrusion amount can be set to be relatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to one having a small external dimension (for example, about several centimeters), and one having a hemispherical shape of about ten and several centimeters may be adopted. Further, as the operation input device such as the operation button 22, various other forms can be adopted. For example, an automobile operation handle, an aircraft operation lever, and a model of a character related to the production content. It is also possible to use a (figure) with a touch sensor added. It is also possible to install a relatively small operation button 22 and one having a form such as an operation lever, and use them properly according to the situation such as the content of the production.

Further, as described above, a cross key (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 may be used as a decision key or the like in a situation where an environment setting or the like is performed. Then, in the present embodiment, the effect operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key is performed in the situation where the effect display device 60 is performing the variable display such as the effect symbol 190 or is not performing the variable display. May be
<< Production when a big hit occurs >>

Next, the effect when a big hit occurs will be described. When a big hit occurs, the production at the start of the special game (big hit start demo), the production during the special game (round production), the production at the end of the final round (win end demo), and the production at the end of the special game There is a production (demonstration of the end of the big hit).

When the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is confirmed and stopped, a display indicating that a big hit is started is displayed along with a sound such as a fanfare. Further, it is possible to exemplify a content that executes a right-handed guidance effect as a hitting instruction during a special game and guides the player to perform a right-handed hit by increasing the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20.

As the production during the above-mentioned special game, a moving image having contents that cannot be seen unless the player wins a big hit can be exemplified. Further, at this time, a predetermined music is output from the speaker 21 (see FIG. 1) described above. Furthermore, as a video during the special game, for example, a picture of a predetermined character in a graphic novel adopted for the production of the pachinko game machine 10 fighting against a rival enemy, or a state of enjoying a jerk is drawn. Can be illustrated.

It should be noted that the switching of the round during the special game is, for example, "1R", "2R", ... In the corner portion (for example, the upper right corner portion) of the display area 194 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). , "15R" can be displayed for notification. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of times the big hit occurs when the big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits are continuous.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned effect after the special game, an example relating to the result of the effect content during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the battle between the characters. Such a production after the special game can also be called an ending production.

Further, as the effect after the special game, the one that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, the one that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to add and display the number of times a big hit occurs when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits are continuous. Further, regarding the succession of big hits, when the number of times of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that has not been selected before that.
<Various concrete production examples>
<< Production by superimposing multiple production members >>

Next, various specific effects that can be carried out in the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing the display of the effect display device 60, the display of the light guide plate 90 described above, and the movable effect member (for example, reference numeral 93). This type of effect is a complex effect by locating the movable effect member in front of the effect display device 60 and combining the display content of the effect display device 60 with the light decoration and movement of the movable effect member.

For example, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 can be seen outside the movable effect display member. For example, when the effect display device 60 displays an image of burning flames, the flame is displayed. A combination of effects in which the movable effect members perform light decoration and movement is executed in front of the. Further, in the light guide plate 90, for example, by performing an effect such that the flame pattern blinks or an effect that the ripple-like pattern blinks, the difference in perspective between the light guide plate 90 and the effect display device 60 is obtained. It can exert a visual effect.

Further, in this state, by executing the effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 90 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 can be displayed on the light guide plate 90. It can be visually recognized by the player while being partially obstructed. Furthermore, by synthesizing changes in the pattern display before and after the movable effect member, a complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and the environment in which the movable effect member is placed can be expressed in a complicated manner. ..

As a result, a more complicated effect can be performed and the effect can be diversified by a limited configuration such as a light guide plate 90, a movable effect member (for example, reference numeral 93), and an effect display device 60. It becomes. Even when the light guide plate 90 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display body, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display body is displayed on a movable effect member (for example, reference numeral 93) behind or the effect display device 60. By setting a part of the content to be in a transparent state so that it can be visually recognized, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing as in the case of the light guide plate 90.

Further, as a mode of using the light guide plate 90, a transmissive liquid crystal display, or the like (referred to as a light guide plate 90 or the like here), a mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 90 or the like and a mode of combining with the effect display device 60 are adopted. It is possible. In the above-mentioned "mode for emphasizing the light guide plate 90 or the like", a color display is performed by using most of the display surface of the light guide plate 90 or the like to make a predetermined image stand out, and the display content of the effect display device 60 behind the light guide plate 90 or the like is displayed. This is a display mode that prevents the player's consciousness from facing as much as possible.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "mode in combination with the effect display device 60", the ratio of the area of the portion of the light guide plate 90 or the like where the color display is performed is suppressed to a predetermined degree, and the display of the effect display device 60 behind is suppressed. This is a display mode in which the player is directed toward the content, and the display of the light guide plate 90 or the like and the display of the effect display device 60 are combined to show the player an effect. Then, in a predetermined case, the effect in the "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 90 or the like" is executed, and in other predetermined cases, the effect in the "mode in combination with the effect display device 60" is executed. , Etc. are possible.
<< Timer display related to the development of production >>

Further, as the display content on the effect display device 60, it is possible to perform a timer display (timer effect) related to the development of the effect. More specifically, for example, during the variable display of the effect symbol 190 (during the variable effect), the timer display area appears in a predetermined case. As the arrangement of the timer display area, a portion or the like in the lower right of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 can be exemplified.

For example, "70:00" or the like is displayed in the timer display area described above. The display such as "70:00" suggests that the production will develop after 70 seconds, and the countdown display will be continued every 1/100 second after the display starts. Then, when the display in the timer display area becomes "00:00", the variable effect is developed and the effect is advanced so that the expectation of the big hit is increased.

The time displayed in the timer display area described above includes various times such as 20 seconds and 40 seconds in addition to the time related to 70 seconds. Further, for example, there is also a composite timer effect in which a 20-second countdown is added as a count display related to the further development of the effect after the 40-second countdown is completed. In addition, even if the display of the variable effect is displayed as if it has ended (all symbols are temporarily stopped), the timer display is confirmed as a big hit by performing the revival effect when the number of seconds remains. It can also be used as a suggestive effect itself.

As the display mode in the timer display area described above, for example, "preparing (waiting)", "START", etc. are displayed prior to the start of the countdown, and "CHANGE" is displayed with the end of the countdown. It is also possible to display "(pending change)", "CHANGE (chance up)", "NEXT (pseudo-ream, re-variation)", "congratulations (hit)" and the like. Further, the countdown is not limited to the development of the production, and for example, a combination of the production symbols 190 such as "777" may be displayed at the end of the countdown so that the occurrence of a big hit is notified. It is possible. In addition, the countdown display is fixed at the moment when it reaches "07:77", "05:55", etc. (timer freeze effect), and finally suggests that the effect symbol 190 stops in the jackpot mode, or " It is also possible to stop at "03:00" and perform an effect suggesting that another chance-up is displayed in addition to the effect corresponding to the timer estimated from the timer time by the player.
<< Production using production patterns >>

In addition, various effects can be exemplified as the effect using the effect symbol 190. For example, in a situation where the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c are temporarily stopped and the middle effect symbol 190b is changing, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c can be changed to other modes. .. As the mode after the change of the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c at this time, for example, a predetermined parenthesis symbol or the like can be exemplified. Then, the changing medium production design 190b is changed to words such as "NEXT", "one more time", and "still more!", And a character image with the left and right sides of the word sandwiched between predetermined parentheses is displayed, and then the production is developed. Let me.

In this way, the effect of changing the effect symbol 190 to a display mode having a different property from that of the past can be used as an effect for connecting the effect before the development and the effect after the development. In addition, as a character image in which a word such as "NEXT" is sandwiched between parentheses, one having a relatively low expectation of development or a big hit and one having a high expectation of development or a big hit are provided (for example, the color of the character string of NEXT is white and red , It is also possible to make it different by gold etc.).

Here, when the effect symbol 190 changes to a display mode having other properties in this way, in the effect display device 60, the reduced size effect symbol (not shown) is placed in a predetermined portion (upper right corner or left end, etc.). ) Can be displayed. By displaying the miniaturized effect symbol, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the effect display in the effect display device 60 while maintaining the notification function that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In order to distinguish between the reduced size effect symbol (190) and the basic size effect symbol 190 before reduction, for example, the effect symbol before reduction is referred to as a "first effect symbol" and is reduced. The later effect symbol can be referred to as a "second effect symbol" or the like.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the effect symbol 190, it is also possible to adopt an effect such as a double reach or a triple reach in which a combination of a plurality of reach is displayed at the same time. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt an effect that develops from double reach to triple reach during one variable effect.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the effect symbol 190, when the variable display of the effect symbol 190 is started, the effect suggestion is performed using the effect symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) that is stopped at the end. Is possible. More specifically, the part of the figure painting in the middle production symbol 190b (the element symbol which is the above-mentioned non-symbol element production symbol) performs an animation operation in which a dialogue is emitted, and as a sound output, a predetermined dialogue for advance notice at the start of fluctuation is performed. Can be illustrated as such as emitting.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the effect symbol 190, when the player repeatedly hits the above-mentioned operation button 22, at least one of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 190a to 190c is in a mode corresponding to the repeated hits. It is possible to adopt what is displayed. Then, as the "mode corresponding to the repeated hits", for example, at least one of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 190a to 190c can be exemplified as trembling (vibrating).

Further, as the "mode corresponding to repeated hits", an example in which the effect symbol is operated once for each detection of one operation of the operation button 22 (a mode in which the operation and the operation are synchronized) can be exemplified. Further, when it is detected that the operation button 22 is repeatedly hit, an animation of the content that the effect symbol trembles (vibrates) can be exemplified. Then, in the detection that the operation button 22 is repeatedly hit, for example, it is determined whether or not an operation more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more) is detected within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). It is possible to execute by.
<< Production using hold display >>

Subsequently, various productions using the above-mentioned hold display can be exemplified. For example, the fluctuation information display 198 of the fluctuation information display unit 195 shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B is temporarily deleted, and the fluctuation information display unit 195 is expected to have a color change, for example. Character information (character state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the degree is increased is displayed. Then, after displaying such state transition suggestion information, the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 may change to something that means a high degree of expectation such as red color or rainbow color. To do.

It is also possible to display the above-mentioned display such as "color change?" As one of the roulette eyes or one of the rotating drums (reels). For example, information displays such as "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" are adopted as the roulette eyes and the design of the rotating drum, and the roulette and rotation are displayed on the fluctuation information display unit 195. Display the drum object. Then, in the fluctuation information display unit 195, the display of "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" is sequentially changed, and the subsequent fluctuation information display is performed in a manner corresponding to the stopped information. It is conceivable that 198 will be done. It is also possible to display an object of a roulette wheel or a rotating drum without erasing the fluctuation information display 198.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the hold display, when the hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b), the hold is held. It is conceivable to proactively notify that a change has occurred or that a pending change will occur immediately afterwards, for example, by displaying pending change information such as "pending change", "red holding", or "rainbow hold". Be done. Here, such display of the hold change information may be performed at the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the hold change is displayed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold change display unit 197. It may be done in the vicinity of the hold display.
<< Production using movable production members >>

Subsequently, various effects can be exemplified as the effects using the above-mentioned movable effect members (93, 94, etc.). For example, a movable effect member (drum unit) in which a plurality of rotating drums (reels) are arranged in a predetermined arrangement (2 rows, 2 columns, etc.) can be used as one of the movable effect members. Then, each rotating drum is individually rotated and controlled, and when stopped (including a temporary stop), the effect develops when the characters and symbols arranged on the drum form a predetermined combination. Can be exemplified. As a place where such a drum unit is arranged, an upper portion of the effect display device 60 and the like can be exemplified. Further, it is also possible to perform an effect such that the drum unit descends from the upper part of the effect display device 60 to the central portion in a predetermined case.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the movable effect member, a movable effect member formed of a light-transmitting material is provided, and the entire display area 194 of the effect display device 60 or the entire display area 194 of the effect display device 60 is passed through the movable effect member. It is possible to make a part visible. Further, different types of movable effect members are arranged in the front-rear direction, the above-mentioned light-transmitting movable effect member is arranged in the front (side close to the player), and the movable effect member in the back is transparent to the movable effect member in the front. It is possible to make the operation of.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the movable effect member, a plurality of (for example, two) small display bodies as described above are provided, and the plurality of display bodies are provided at least in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction. It is possible to combine them so that they are adjacent to each other in one direction. More specifically, for example, two rectangular display bodies are supported so as to be swingable to the left and right about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Then, each display body is arranged above and below the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 (may be left or right).

Further, when a predetermined effect is executed, the upper display body is lowered and the lower display body is raised so that each display body approaches in front of the display area 194. Then, the lower side of the upper display body and the upper side of the lower display body are opposed to each other horizontally and in parallel, and both display bodies are vertically adjacent to each other. Then, a predetermined effect display is performed on each display body, and an effect by combining the two display bodies is executed.

In addition, when another predetermined effect is executed, the angles of the upper and lower display bodies are changed, and the posture of each display body is changed from a horizontal state to an oblique direction, for example, upward to the left, with the screen facing the front. Change to the state of. That is, the upper side and the lower side of each rectangular display body are in an oblique state of rising to the left, and accordingly, the left side and the right side of each display body are in a diagonal state of rising to the right. Then, both display bodies are moved so as to approach each other in front of the display area 194, and the lower side of the upper display body and the upper side of the lower display body are opposed to each other diagonally and in parallel, so that both display bodies are moved up and down. Adjacent.
<< Other productions >>

As an effect other than the various effects as described above, the effect symbol 190 in the effect display device 60 is stopped (including a temporary stop) immediately after a predetermined effect outside the display area 194 of the effect display device 60. Can be considered. More specifically, in the effect display device 60, in a situation where at least one of the effect symbols 190a to 190c is changing, for example, the light decoration portion of the center decoration 64 or the movable circular effect member (93, 94, etc.) ) Light decoration unit executes a predetermined light decoration effect.

The above-mentioned light decoration effect can be expected to allow the player to remove the line of sight from the effect display device 60, for example, for example, the light emission with a relative intensity higher than that of the normal effect is instantaneously performed only once. It is desirable that it is a thing. Immediately after this light decoration effect (for example, within 1 second), the effect symbol 190 is stopped (including temporary stop) at a 3-digit doublet indicating the occurrence of a big hit. With such an effect, it is possible to give the player the impression that a big hit has occurred in the gap where the player looks away during the fluctuation.

In addition, as another effect, in addition to outputting the dialogue on the production as a voice, the characters representing the dialogue are displayed on the production display device 60, and the display of the dialogue is switched according to the speed of the voice output. Can be considered. More specifically, when the voice output of the line "I called here is nothing else" is started, the information that can identify the character who utters the line on the production display device 60 (here, the name "A"). ") And the text" A: Nothing else called here "is displayed. Then, when the voice-output dialogue moves to the next "There is something you definitely want to see", the characters "A: There is something you definitely want to see" are displayed on the production display device 60. ..

Furthermore, when the dialogue output by voice shifts to "What do you want to show?" By character B, the effect display device 60 asks "B: What do you want to show?" The characters are displayed. By showing the characters' lines to the player in a form that combines voice output and character display in this way, even when fast dialogue is exchanged, the content of the production can be clearly communicated to the player. Can be done.

In addition, since the dialogue is displayed in characters after showing the characters, the situation where the character who utters the dialogue is not displayed on the screen, or the character who is different from the character who utters the dialogue is displayed on the screen. Even when the voice is output in the present situation, it is possible to clearly convey the content of the production to the player.

Further, as another effect, it can be exemplified that a movable effect member such as a shoji or a shutter is further provided on the small display body to hide the display content behind it. It is also conceivable to provide a shoji screen, a shutter, a curtain, a curtain, a scratch film, or the like as an object to be displayed as an image.

Further, as another effect, it is possible to adopt an operation button 22 that can be operated other than the pressing operation. As the operation other than the pressing operation, a touch operation using a touch panel and a twisting operation that the player grabs and turns can be exemplified. Further, it is possible to adopt an operation button device capable of performing a plurality of these various operation modes. When an operation button device capable of performing a plurality of modes of operation is adopted, it is conceivable to guide the player in the operation mode to be executed as a guide display related to the button operation as described above. ..

Further, as another effect, it is possible to display, for example, a two-dimensional code during the variable effect. Then, in this case, the player takes out a mobile terminal such as a smartphone during the fluctuation production, reads the two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, accesses a predetermined external server, and uses the game or model. It is conceivable to make it possible to acquire such various information.

Further, as another effect, in the effect display device 60, for example, in a situation where the effect develops when the character "development" is displayed, the character "departure" is displayed, and the character "departure" is displayed. It is conceivable to display a roulette wheel or a rotating drum (reel) on the right side. Then, it is possible to adopt an effect in which the characters "exhibition" are used as one eye of a roulette wheel or one rotating drum, and the effect is developed when the characters of "exhibition" are stopped.

Further, as another effect, for example, in a situation where the effect develops when a predetermined character appears, it is possible to display a timer for the time until the character appears. This timer display may be a time shorter than the time until the end of the variable effect at that time, as in the above-described effect example. In addition to this, the time may be longer than the time until the end of the fluctuation effect at that time. In such a case, the timer display is executed as one of the above-mentioned genuine continuous notices. Is possible.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. In the following, the commands related to the ordinary electric accessory and the other main commands will be described separately, but here, the main commands other than the commands related to the ordinary electric accessory will be described first. First, the command transmission timing is as follows: during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), when the special symbol symbol changes, when the special symbol symbol is confirmed, when the special symbol symbol is confirmed, when the jackpot start demo There are times when the jackpot medium and large prize openings are open, when the jackpot medium and large prize openings are closed, when the hit end demonstration is performed, and when the jackpot end demo is completed. Of these, the initial screen display is the period from when the power of the pachinko game machine 10 is turned on until the customer waiting demonstration is started and the steady state is entered. In addition, a command is transmitted in any case when the start prize is won, when the power is restored, and when an error is detected. Further, the command transmission is executed even when the RWM is cleared.

Among these, the commands for clearing the RWM include commands for initializing the effect display, initializing the effect LED, and commands for various errors. The effect display initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect symbol on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to turn on a part of the game effect lamp when the communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying an effect according to the error state.

As a command for the customer waiting demo, there is a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demo command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demo and erasing the sound.

The commands at the start of the symbol change of the special symbol include the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2, the communication inspection 1, the communication inspection 2, the number of effects AZ, the effect selection states 0 to 2, the variation additional information, and the symbol 1 effect. There are commands for pattern, symbol 2 effect pattern, symbol 1 character effect, and symbol 2 character effect. The symbol 1 storage number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 storage number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol. The communication inspection 1 command and the communication inspection 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The various commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the various commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. It is a thing. The variable addition information command indicates information for adding an element (effect component) that suggests, for example, a jackpot expectation degree, to the effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a thing. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

As a command for confirming the symbol of the special symbol, there are a command for stopping the symbol 1 effect pattern and a command for stopping the symbol 2 effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the first special symbol and the effect symbol 190 based on the second special symbol, respectively.

The commands during which the symbol of the special symbol is being confirmed include the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened 0 (at low probability), the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened AZ (at low probability), the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened 0 (at high probability), and the probability is changing (at high probability). There is a command (up to the specified number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting commands related to the game state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time reduction number display, and the like.

The commands at the time of the jackpot start demo include the symbol 1 jackpot start demo, the symbol 2 jackpot start demo, and the command for specifying the launch position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is for notifying the launch position when the player is made to strike the game ball between the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening 92 by so-called left-handed or right-handed. belongs to.

As commands when the big hit medium big winning opening is opened, there are commands for symbol 1 big hit medium demos 1 to 16 and symbol 2 big hit medium demos 1 to 16. These are for displaying the effect based on the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As a command when the big hit medium big prize opening is closed, there is a big winning opening closing production command. This is for displaying the big winning opening closing effect.

As commands at the time of the jackpot end demo, there are commands for the end per symbol and the end demo for 2 symbols. These are for displaying the winning end demonstration effect based on the winning symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The commands at the time of starting winning include commands for hit notice (hit notice effect), symbol notice (hit symbol notice effect), fluctuation notice (pattern notice effect), symbol 1 memory number, and symbol 2 memory number. Each of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice command is a command (look-ahead command) related to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect by the advance information notification means 157. The winning notice command is for transmitting a random number range of winning / failing random numbers, and includes information on winning / failing according to the lottery probability. The symbol advance notice command is for transmitting a random number range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the type of hit. Further, the fluctuation warning command is for transmitting a random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The commands for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 are for transmitting the reserved number of stored numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in this embodiment, as a result of the winning / failing lottery, information such as the presence / absence of the look-ahead effect and the period is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice.

The commands at the time of power failure recovery are communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, game states A to E for power failure recovery, number of effects A to Z, effect selection states 0 to 2, symbol 1 character effect, symbol 2 character effect, There are commands such as a power failure recovery hit state, a special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery, a special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, firing position designation, errors a to d, a symbol 1 storage number, and a symbol 2 storage number.

The commands of communication inspection 1 and communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. The commands of the game states A to E for recovering from the power failure are for transmitting different commands depending on the game state at the time of the power failure. The commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1-character effect and the symbol 2-character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery hit state command is for transmitting different commands depending on whether or not the command is hit. The command of the special symbol 1 state when the power is restored and the special symbol 2 state when the power is restored sends a command according to the state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, such as waiting, changing, or hitting. Is for. As described above, the launch position designation command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation. The errors a to d are for transmitting the presence / absence and type of the error. The commands for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 are for transmitting the reserved number of stored first special symbols and second special symbols.
<Main control processing of the main board>

Next, the main control processing on the main board 102 of the pachinko game machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14 and the like. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "conditional device", and "continuous operation device for accessory" used below will be described. All of these represent conceptual devices in the control processing of the Pachinko game machine 10, and among these, the "special electric accessory" operates the first special winning opening 91 and the second special winning opening 92. It will be. In addition, the "conditional device" operates when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" operates the special electric accessory continuously a plurality of times. Can be done.

Further, the main control processes of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here are the control start process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 13, and the power cutoff process shown in FIG. Is executed on the main board 102.
<Control start processing>

The control start process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is a control process that is started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed by turning on the power of the pachinko game machine 10, and the control start process will be described later. After executing the settings (S1 to S4) required when the power is turned on, the power cut information flag (power cut confirmation information) in the operation state (S5) of the initialization switch 544 and the power cut status confirmation process (S6 to S8) Corresponding to the value and the addition result (checksum data) of the RWM area, the processing at the time of power failure / recovery (S9 to S17), the processing at the time of RWM initialization (S24 to S26), and the timing setting for the game progress interrupt. (S27), circulation processing (S32 (S28 to S31)), and the like are executed.
<< Settings required when turning on the power >>

As the settings required when the power is turned on, the stack pointer setting (S1), the interrupt mode setting (S2), and the access permission setting to the RWM503 (S3) are performed, and then the internal register is initially set (S3). S4).

Of these, in the process of setting the stack pointer (S1), in order to secure the stack area, the stack pointer is set as the initial value of the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is set to a specific address. Next, in the interrupt mode setting (S2), the mode of the predetermined number is set, and in the RWM access permission setting (S3), the access permission data is set in the predetermined register in order to permit access to the RWM. To do. As a result, the masqueradable interrupt is set to a specific interrupt mode, and the CPU built-in RWM is granted access permission. Further, in the built-in register setting (S4), various corresponding setting values such as the game progress interrupt use setting value and the clock source selection value are set by using the built-in register initial setting table. The interrupt on the main board 102 will be described later.
<< Checking the operating status of the RWM clear switch >>

In the process of confirming the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5), the state of the output signal of the initialization switch 544 input via the input port is confirmed. Whether or not the RWM clear switch is pressed (turned on) is determined, and if it is not pressed (S5: NO), the value of the power failure information flag during the power failure status determination process (S6 to S8) described later. Proceed to the determination process (S6) of. On the other hand, if the initialization switch 544 is pressed (S5: YES), the processing at the time of initializing the RWM (S24 to S26) is performed.

Here, the initialization switch 544 is determined to have been operated when the RWM clear switch bit of the corresponding input port is determined to be ON five times in a row. Further, the determination of the information as to whether or not the initialization switch 544 is pressed is performed only once at this time, and the determination is not performed thereafter.
<< Situation confirmation process at the time of power failure >>

In the power failure status confirmation process (S6 to S8) when the initialization switch 544 is not operated, the value of the power failure information flag is read, and whether the read value matches the predetermined power failure normal data. Whether or not it is determined (S6). The power-off normal data is saved when the power-off process is normally performed when the power-off (power-off) occurs.

If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (S6: YES), the checksum data is calculated (S7). In the process of calculating the checksum data, although not shown, the initial value is set as the checksum data, a predetermined operation is performed on the checksum data, and then the checksum data after the calculation is 0. It is determined whether or not it is different from.

If the checksum data is not 0 (S8: NO), that is, if the restart preparation process execution condition is not satisfied, the RWM head and top are set higher than the reference value of the relative address, and in this case also the RWM. Shifts to the process at the time of initialization (S24 or later). On the other hand, when the checksum data is 0 (S8: YES), the process proceeds to the process (S9 to S17) at the time of power failure / recovery, which will be described later.
<< Processing when power is turned off and restored >>

In the process when the power is turned off and restored, the value of the stack pointer buffer is set in the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is returned to the value saved when the power is turned off (S9). Further, in order to inspect the communication line between the main board 102 and the sub board 104, a request is made to transmit an effect control command to the sub board 104 (S10, S11), and a decorative lamp (game effect lamp) and a sound effect (sound effect) are requested. In order to return the effect of (effect) to the state before the power failure occurred, a request is made to transmit the effect control command to the sub-board 104 (S10, S11). Further, in order to request a command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol display device, a symbol storage number command request process is executed (S12).

Further, the solenoid is returned to the output state before the power failure occurred (S13). Specifically, the open / closed state of the second starting winning opening 63, the first major winning opening 91, and the second major winning opening 92 is returned to the state before the power is turned off.

After that, the process proceeds to the subsequent process of setting the special symbol (S14), and the information on the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device (70, 71) is set. Next, the power recovery setting (S15), the data storage process (S16), and the detection setting (S17) of the communication line abnormality with the payout control board are executed.

Subsequently, in the process of activating the game progress interrupt process, the address of the PTC0 counter setting register is set in order to activate the game progress interrupt, and the count value of a predetermined size (corresponding to about 4 ms here) is set to the PTC0 counter. It is set in the register (S18). As a result, the game progress interrupt is generated every 4 ms.

Then, the process of restoring various registers other than the flag register is executed (S19), and the process of determining whether or not the state when the power supply is cut off is interrupt enabled (S20) is executed. Then, when the power is turned off when the interrupt is disabled (S20: NO), the flag register is restored (S21), and the control process is turned off based on the restart index information set in the stack pointer. Return to the processing of the address to be returned before the occurrence. On the other hand, if the interrupt is enabled when the power is turned off (S20: YES), the flag register is restored (S22), the interrupt enable is set (S23), and then the stack pointer is set. Based on the restart index information, the control process is returned to the process to be returned before the power failure occurred.

Here, the reason why the flag register is restored separately from the other registers is that the flag register stores information on the game state such as probability change, and the control process is turned off as much as possible to restore this information. This is because it is performed immediately before returning to before the occurrence of.
<< Processing at the time of RWM initialization >>

In the processing at the time of initializing the RWM (S24 to S28), after clearing the RWM area (S24), the initial setting of the RWM (S25), the initialization of the effect display (effect display device 60) (S26), and The timekeeping setting (S27) for interrupting the game progress is performed. Of these, in the processing from clearing the RWM area (S24) to initial setting of the RWM (S25), clear data (00H) is set in the entire RWM area, and the clear data is stored as a reference value for the relative address, and this reference value is used. Is +1. Further, bit 7 of this reference value is inspected, and the determination of the inspection result is executed. If the inspection result is 0 in the inspection result determination process, the process returns to the process of storing the clear data described above in the reference value, and the address of the initialization data setting table is set. As a result, the initial value of RWM is set. It should be noted that the clearing of the RWM area is not limited to the one performed for all areas, for example, only a part of the area where specific information is stored or the area excluding the unused area is cleared. May be good.

In addition, like "00H" which is the value of the above-mentioned clear data, "H" described at the end of a numerical value indicates that the numerical value is expressed in hexadecimal notation. Further, in this embodiment, a numerical value representing a hexadecimal number is given a symbol "H", a numerical value representing a binary number is given a symbol "B", and a symbol indicating such a notation is attached. Numerical values that are not specified shall be expressed in decimal numbers.

In the initialization of the effect display device (S26), in order to initialize the effect display device 60 and request the transmission of commands for error status and illegal prize ball monitoring information, command request data setting with the address of the effect initial command setting table as an argument. Execute the process.
<< Processing of timekeeping setting for game progress interrupt >>

In the timekeeping setting process (S27) for the game progress interrupt, in order to activate the game progress interrupt, a count value of a predetermined size is set in the corresponding counter setting register, and the game progress interrupt is generated every 4 ms, for example. ..
<< Circulation processing >>

After the timekeeping setting (S27) for the game progress interrupt, the recursive (restart) preparation of a predetermined timer, which is the interrupt processing time monitoring means, and the random number-related values used for generating the initial values of various random numbers are updated. Circulation processing (S32 (S28 to S31)) is executed. In this circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)), interrupts are first disabled (S28) in order to manage the game machine. Further, in preparation for recurring the interrupt processing time monitoring means, a predetermined value to be the first recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29). This first recursive information is a predetermined value such as 55H.

Then, the initial value random number update process is executed (S30), and the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. After that, after the interrupt is permitted (S31), the process returns to the interrupt disabled (S28) process, and the subsequent processes (S28 to S31) are sequentially repeated to circulate the control process.

Each time the interrupt enable (S28) is executed, the game progress interrupt described above becomes possible, and the game progress interrupt process is repeated every predetermined cycle (here, a 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in S27. ..
<< Initial value random number update process >>

In the above-mentioned initial value random number update process (S30), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol, the random numbers are updated from the initial value random number update table. The number of times is acquired, and the initial value random number is updated by the number of updates.
<Game progress interrupt processing>

Next, the game progress interrupt process that is repeated at a cycle of 4 ms based on the cycle information set in the process of the timekeeping setting (S27) for the game progress interrupt will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the game progress interrupt processing, interrupt operation condition setting (S41, S42), recursion of interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), game machine management (S45 to S70), interrupt permission (S45 to S70) S71) is performed in order to return to the processing before the game progress interrupt occurs.

Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting process (S41, S42), the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41) in order to clear the interrupt flag, and the interrupt operation condition setting. The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). After that, the second recursive information is set (S43), and the second recursive information is further set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44).

In the management of game machines (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order in order to manage the game machines.

First, an input process (S45) is executed in order to monitor the input of a specific signal. Here, the targets of monitoring are various switches mounted on the game board surface, saucer full switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass undetected signal, and disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal. Is.

Subsequently, various random number update processes (S46) are executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, the initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, the initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. Further, in order to update the 2-byte timer, the timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set the validity period of the second start winning opening 63, the validity period setting process (S50) of the second start opening is executed. ..

Further, the prize monitoring process (S51) is executed, the number of times the prize balls are paid out is stored, the output request of the external information for the board is created, and the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the sub board 104 is performed. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, the prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gates (operating ports 68a and 68b), the normal symbol operating gate monitoring process (S53) is executed in order to store the random numbers related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or The normal symbol control process (S54) is executed in order to perform the process related to the normal symbol electric accessory. Further, in order to monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. Further, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol is executed. In order to perform the process related to the display unit 71, the special symbol control process (S57) is executed. Subsequently, in order to perform the processing related to the special electric accessory, the special electric accessory control process (S58) is executed, and the processing related to the validity period of the first special winning opening 91 or the second large winning opening 92 is performed. The special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60) is executed in order to execute the large winning opening validity period setting process (S59) and monitor the fluctuation start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, anomaly detection processing (S61) is executed to monitor magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply, radio wave monitoring, open / closed state of glass frame set / game board frame, and pair glass. Then, in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Further, in order to request display of the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol display device, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol display device, the game state display process (S63). ) Is executed, and the handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed in order to monitor the touch state (including the state of the operation amount) of the firing handle 20. In addition, display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of balls on hold for operation of special symbol display device (70, 71), display of number of balls on hold for operation of normal symbol display device, display of game status, special electric accessory The LED output process (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times that the is continuously operated and the error is displayed.

Subsequently, in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the launch control signal output process (S66) is executed, and in order to create and output a signal to be output to the test device, the test signal output process (S67) is performed. To execute. Further, in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid, the first special winning opening opening solenoid, and the second special winning opening opening solenoid, the solenoid output processing (S68) is executed and the effect control command is transmitted. , The effect control command transmission process (S69) is executed, and the external information output process (S70) is executed in order to output signals to the external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

After that, the interrupt enable (S71) is executed, and the control process exits to the return (RET). Then, the above-mentioned circular processing (S32 (S28 to S31)) of the control start processing is executed by utilizing the remaining time until the next game interrupt is executed.
<< Production control command transmission processing >>

In the effect control command transmission process (S69), the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the effect control board is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is cleared. , Acquisition of MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output of MODE data, retention of MODE data, acquisition of EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output of EVENT data are sequentially performed. The command data transmission timing is defined by the effect data strobe, and the effect data holding time is a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) after the on-time (here, 2 μs or more) of the effect data strobe signal.

In the command transmission request inspection, the value of the command request write position (area) and the value of the command request read position (area) are compared, and if the values do not match, it is determined that there is a command transmission request. When acquiring the command data to be requested, the calculated value of the address stored in the command request reading position, the double value of the logical product of the position correction bit data, and the address of the command buffer are added, and the content of the acquired address is added as a result of the addition. Is the command data. After acquiring the calculated address stored in the command request reading position, the command request reading position is incremented by 1 in order to update the contents of the command data reading position. When clearing the command buffer, in order to clear the command buffer, the command buffer in which the acquired command data is stored is cleared with 0.

In the acquisition of MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, the higher level of the acquired command data is defined as MODE data. In the output of MODE data, after the acquired MODE data is output to the effect command output port, the strobe output process is executed in order to output the effect data strobe. In the retention of MODE data, in order to retain the MODE data, a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) is waited. In the acquisition of EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, the lower level of the acquired command data is defined as EVENT data. In the output of EVENT data, after the acquired EVENT data is output to the same effect command output port as described above, the effect data strobe is output, so that the strobe output process is executed.
<< Control mode related to command transmission timing >>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer by a command request before transmission. The command buffer has a plurality of buffers functioning as ring buffers, and is used once in the order of accumulation in the command buffer in the control process for command transmission (here, the effect control command transmission process (S69)). Each command is fetched from the command buffer and transmitted in the game progress interrupt process. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the command with the highest priority is sent first. Further, in various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted occurs, it is possible to transmit the command at any time. When such a method is adopted, the effect command is intensively transmitted in one control processing module such as the effect control command transmission process (S69) during one game progress interrupt process. Instead, each time a command transmission is required, the command transmission is sequentially performed in each control processing module. Therefore, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the game progress interrupt processing from the next time onward. Then, for example, there is no delay in the command transmission at the start winning or the command transmission at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the command processing can be performed quickly.
<< Power off processing >>

Next, the power off processing executed when the power is cut off will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the power off processing, the data of all used registers is saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable / disable state before the power off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is saved in the RWM (S83), and if it is not saved (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is saved in the RWM (S84). The process proceeds to the RWM access prohibition process (S88). On the other hand, if it is saved (S83: YES), the stack pointer value is saved in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the power off / normal information is saved in the RWM (S86), and the RWM checksum is calculated. Then, the checksum data is saved (S87). Then, the access is prohibited from RWM (S88), and the reset of the CPU 501 is waited while looping the control process.
<< Control mode related to lottery of fluctuation pattern >>

Subsequently, various aspects related to the lottery of the variable pattern will be described. Any of the modes of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied in one pachinko game machine 10, or may be used in combination as appropriate. Then, when a plurality of modes are used in combination, it is possible to use the modes properly based on factors such as the result of success or failure.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning / failing result, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol) are determined for determining the variation pattern. Although used as an element, a variation pattern corresponding to the combination of these determinants is selected. Then, as the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern and paired with the fluctuation pattern is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the elements of the determination are different depending on whether the result of the winning or losing lottery is a big hit or a miss. That is, in the case of a big hit, a variation pattern is selected from among those associated with the effect state (status information of the special symbol, etc.), the special symbol group, and the random number of success or failure. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a fluctuation pattern is selected from among those associated with the effect state, the number of reserved balls, and the random number of success or failure. Of these, regarding the fluctuation pattern in which the re-lottery time is given for the production in the case of a big hit, the re-lottery time is given based on the production state (presence or absence of a specific production, etc.) and the special symbol group. The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.

Further, when determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine the subsequent fluctuation time according to the determined effect pattern number (in other words, the content of the effect pattern). For example, when the selected fluctuation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern production, it is conceivable that the extension of the fluctuation time corresponding to the variation pattern is determined ex post facto.

In addition, as described above, by setting the command of the fluctuation additional information as the command at the start of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol, the command is later determined during the fluctuation time determined in advance in relation to the elements such as the game state and the winning symbol. It is possible to add an effect such as a notice. Then, in the case of determining the total fluctuation time in such an embodiment, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance as small as follows. That is, considering the case of performing the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-ream"), when the fluctuation patterns of the pseudo-ream are simply set individually, the same number of fluctuation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. Need to keep. When all the effect patterns are prepared individually in this way, it is conceivable that the total number of fluctuation patterns becomes large, reaching, for example, more than 256. Therefore, in order to give an identifiable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for expressing the code as compared with the conventional case.

However, by using the fluctuation addition information (variation addition pattern), it is possible to form a fluctuation pattern ex post facto by connecting, for example, random number lottery fluctuation addition information to a relatively small number of basic fluctuation patterns. Is. As a result, a new fluctuation pattern can be formed by combining the fluctuation patterns, so that various fluctuation patterns can be created without making the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance excessive. It should be noted that the random number value related to the variable addition information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 when the start winning prize is generated as a command for the look-ahead effect. It is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variable addition pattern so that the variable addition information can be easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed. To further give an example of using the variable additional information, when the probabilistic variable symbol "777" is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the effect symbols 190, the variable additional information is not set and the combination of the effect symbols 190 is used. Once the non-probability variation symbol "666" is displayed, the effect until the result of whether or not to promote to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of shaking fluctuation and the development of the variation mode). (Representation, etc.) may be performed by setting variable additional information.

Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined with the number of reserved balls as an element, and the reference fluctuation pattern table differs depending on the number of reserved balls. The fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4. The reason why the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided in addition to the four hold 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from a situation where the number of reserved balls is four, and the number of reserved balls becomes three. A state in which the number of reserved balls is 3 at a stage in which the control process during the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time does not reach the determination of the fluctuation pattern, which is the process during the later game progress interrupt process. When a new start prize is generated from, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be a factor for determining the fluctuation pattern.

Further, the acquisition timing of the variable pattern random number can be set to the time of the variable pattern lottery. That is, since the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of a special electric accessory or the like, as an element for performing an appropriate game, for example, in aiming for a fair game as compared with a random number of success or failure. The need for constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the variable pattern random number is not intentionally acquired at the time of starting winning, and for example, the variable pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of the variable pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, the number of information to be stored at the time of winning the start can be reduced, and the capacity of the program and the memory can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to symbol designation >>

In the symbol lottery, the symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the code indicating the symbol random number, and then the symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number. Is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical range of the symbol random number is set to "0 to 999", the binary code code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. In addition, the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of time reductions is distributed to the winning symbols (which may be a symbol group), and the number of subsequent rounds and the number of time reductions are determined according to the winning symbols. You may. By doing so, it is not necessary to store or control the data unique to the game state, and the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. Further, information for transmitting the game state (game state designation information) to a command for transmitting a symbol or the like from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 (for example, each command of the symbol 1 effect pattern and the symbol 2 effect pattern in this embodiment). ) Can be added. This command is not transmitted to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<Main control processing of sub-board>

Next, the main control processing of the above-mentioned sub-board 104 will be described. Here, as the main control processing, various interrupt processing which is exception processing and processing related to these will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18.
<< Interrupt factor and priority level >>

First, in this embodiment, in the sub-main board 301 constituting the sub-board 104, a predetermined signal (reset signal) to the reset terminal provided on the CPU 521 is used as an interrupt factor (factor generation source) that the CPU 521 gives the highest priority. There is input and various abnormalities occur. Of these, the reset signal is input when the power is turned on, when an external reset is performed, when the watchdog timer times out, etc., and the sub-main initial setting process described later is accompanied by the reset signal input. (See FIG. 15) is executed.

On the other hand, the interrupt when various abnormalities occur is executed depending on whether or not the watchdog timer function (watchdog function) is effectively set. That is, if the watchdog function is enabled, the processing of the CPU 521 shifts to, for example, a predetermined infinite loop so that the processing time exceeds the set time of the watchdog timer when a predetermined abnormality occurs. To do. Then, when the runaway is detected due to the timeout in the watchdog function, the sub-main initial setting process (see FIG. 15) described later is executed. When the above-mentioned various abnormalities and the input of the reset signal occur at the same time, the reset by the input of the reset signal (sub-main initial setting process) is prioritized.

Another cause of interrupt generation in the sub-main board 301 is the reception of a command (main command) from the main board 102. It is determined that the command is being received from the main board 102 by detecting the rise of the above-mentioned strobe signal (effect data strobe signal) from the main board 102. When this main command reception interrupt occurs, the main command reception process (see FIG. 17) described later is executed. In the main command reception process, in the case of normal reception in which the command can be received without any problem, the content of the received command is saved in the command buffer (command ring buffer), and the command analysis process is the main process described later (FIG. 16). It is performed in the main loop process (circular process of S124 to S132) in (see). The priority level of the main command reception interrupt is set to the next highest level 7 after the above-mentioned highest priority.

Further, when the above-mentioned watchdog function is enabled, an interrupt is generated when a runaway detection of the CPU 521 is performed without going through a process of intentionally timing out as in the case of the above-mentioned various abnormalities. (Runaway detection interrupt) occurs, and the sub-main initial setting process (see FIG. 15) described later is executed. The priority level of the interrupt by such a normal watchdog timer is level 3, which is four steps lower than the above-mentioned level 7. In this embodiment, the level 4 to 6 interrupts between the level 3 and the above-mentioned level 7 are not executed.

Further, as another interrupt generation factor, there is transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302. The interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub command reception interrupt) is generated when a reception command (sub-sub command) from the sub-sub board 302 is input. The reception command from the sub-sub board 302 conveys to the sub-main board 301 that the command has been normally received when the sub-sub board 302 receives a command (sub-main command) from the sub-main board 301. Then, when an interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, command transmission / reception management processing is executed. The command transmission from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 is performed when the monitoring toggle signal from the sub-sub board 302 is normally transmitted, as will be described later. The priority of interrupts related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 is level 2.

Further, another interrupt generation factor is communication with the sub-sub board 302. Interrupts related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub communication interrupts) are generated every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this embodiment) as described later. Then, when an interrupt related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, communication processing with the sub-sub board is executed. The priority of the interrupt related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 is the same level 2 as the interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 described above.

Furthermore, other interrupt generation factors include communication with the RTC clock (real-time clock), generation of timer interrupts (sub-main timer interrupts), interrupt requests for various lamps, etc., and these have the lowest priority. It is set to 1. Of these, at the time of an interrupt related to communication with the RTC clock, communication processing with the RTC clock is executed. Further, the above-mentioned timer interrupt is intended to be used in general game production such as solenoid output processing, motor output processing, and game timer management processing. The timer interrupt is immediately activated by the setting at the time of initialization (initial setting), and the timer interrupt is repeated every predetermined cycle (about 1 ms in this embodiment). Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed.
<< Sub-main initial setting process >>

When the power of the sub-main board 301 is turned on, as in the case where the power of the pachinko game machine 10 is turned on, the sub-main initial setting process shown in FIG. 15 is executed. In this sub-main initial setting process, first, a predetermined address is set as a stack pointer (S101), and then all interrupts are prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S102). Further, in the hardware initialization process (S103), basic settings related to the hardware (register setting, port initialization, etc.) are performed, and in the RWM initialization process (S104), the RWM initialization is performed according to a predetermined condition. Is done. Then, in this RWM initialization, the initial value is prepared for the variable with the initial value, and 0 is cleared for the variable without the initial value. Further, in the RWM initialization process (S104), ROM data (control program, etc.) is expanded to the RWM.

Further, in S105, interrupts other than reception of the main command are prohibited, and subsequently, a power failure recovery error detection process (S106) for setting various error information is executed. In this power failure recovery error detection process (S106), processing is performed according to circumstances such as game characteristics. That is, the sub-main board 301 is provided with a function of dealing with various errors including vibration errors and radio wave errors. However, the functions for dealing with these various errors are selected in advance, and the error detection function is exhibited only for the valid errors. For example, whether or not a predetermined hit occurs when a game ball passes through a specific area, such as a type 1 type 2 type that combines so-called type 1 and type 2 game characteristics, or a so-called ball accuracy spec. The vibration error detection function is effective for models that determine. However, in a model such as the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment, in which the winning / failing lottery is performed only by the random number lottery, even if the vibration error detection function is provided, the function is selectively invalidated in advance. Therefore, no special measures are taken for vibration errors.

Subsequently, in the all lamp extinguishing process (S107), an extinguishing request is made to extinguish all the lamps, and in the watchdog timer operation start process (S108), based on the setting of using the watchdog timer as the watchdog timer. The watchdog timer is activated. In FIG. 15, the main process (S109) is connected to the processes S101 to S108, but the processes S101 to S108 are the sub-main initial setting processes, and the main process (S109). Is performed after the sub-main initial setting process (S101 to S108). Further, in the main process (S109), the main process of the game is managed, and the details of the main process (S109) will be described later.

After the main process (S109), a sleep process (S110) is arranged. Normally, this sleep process (S110) is not executed because the reset operation that performs the sub-main initial setting process is not returned from the main process (S109), but as shown by the broken line arrow in the figure, When this sleep process (S110) is executed for some reason, the mode shifts to the low power consumption mode.
<< Main processing on the sub-main board >>

In the above-mentioned main process (S109), as shown in FIG. 16, the RWM placement address acquisition process (S121) is executed, and in this RWM placement address acquisition process (S121), the program area expanded in the RWM is checked. The start address of the expanded program area is acquired so that it can be performed.

Next, all interrupts are permitted in order to enable interrupts in subsequent processing (S122). Further, in the device initialization process (S123), initialization operations of various devices such as motors, solenoids, and lamps are performed. In the subsequent watchdog clear process (S124), if the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared. Further, in the symbol update process (S125), the counters determine the out-of-order symbols related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c.

As the counter used here, a three-digit counter of "111" to "999" can be exemplified. For example, when the acquired counter value is "757", the effect symbols 190a to stop display are displayed. It is possible to make 190 "757". When the acquired counter value is a combination of stitches such as "111", it is possible to offset the numerical value of a predetermined digit such as "121" to make a combination of deviations.

This symbol update process (S125) may not be executed depending on the adopted method for determining the outlier symbol. For example, when the missing symbol is determined by lottery, it is not executed, and specifically, it has the data of the lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all the symbol combinations, and the missing symbol is selected using the lottery sheet. A control mode as determined can be exemplified.

In the subsequent error effect management process (S126), the error state is monitored, and various error notifications are executed according to the monitoring result. Further, the push button monitoring control process (S127) is for controlling the operation button 22 described above, which is a sub-button (push button) for effect, and corresponds to the input state (operation state) of the operation button 22. Execute the process.

Next, in the advance notice lottery management process (S128), a lottery for determining the advance notice effect is executed, and the lottery for this advance notice effect is the efficiency of the loop processing (main loop process) described later in the main process (S109). It is divided into several times to improve efficiency). That is, when multiple advance notice effects are executed during one fluctuation, the lottery process for the multiple advance notice effects is not all performed in one main loop, but multiple main loops. It is executed after multiple lottery divided into. In addition, the timing of the lottery is related to the timing of the appearance of the notice effect during the fluctuation. For example, for a notice effect that appears at a relatively early timing, such as immediately after the start of fluctuation, the priority of the lottery time is set high, and by performing the lottery at the timing according to the priority, image control is performed as soon as possible. Commands can be sent to the sub-sub board 302 on the side. The various processes performed in the advance notice lottery management process (S128) will be described later.

Next, in the device management process (S129), when there is a device operation request for a real-time clock (RTC), a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, lamps, etc., a process for operating the corresponding device is executed. ..

Further, in the command analysis process (S130), when it is necessary to start the process for responding to the command (main command) received from the main board 102 or when the command data exists in the above-mentioned command buffer, the command analysis is performed. Do. Then, when the command is analyzed (S131: YES), the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S124), and the main loop is executed. Immediately after receiving the command from the main board 102, since there is command data in the command buffer, the main loop is executed and the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S124) and thereafter. However, if the command buffer becomes empty before the main loop is repeated and the next timer interrupt described later is executed, it is not necessary to perform command analysis, and command analysis is not performed. In such a case, the random number update process (S132), which has a lower priority than the command analysis, is executed by utilizing the generated time without proceeding to the main loop (S131: NO). This random number update process (S132) is a soft random number update process. Further, in this command analysis process (S130), the fluctuation pattern (sub-variation pattern) in the sub-main board 301 is determined. Further, when the data of the lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all the symbol combinations is possessed and the control mode for determining the out-of-order symbols is adopted by using the lottery sheet, the command analysis process (S130) is performed. Determine the design.

Regarding the processes (S130, S131) related to these command analysis, in other words, for a certain command, immediately after receiving the command, the main process does not proceed to the subsequent processes (here, the random number update process (S132)). The other processes (S124 to S131) in the loop process (S124 to S132) are repeated, and if there are no more commands in the command buffer, the process proceeds to the subsequent processes, and as a result, the command analysis process is performed for a certain main command. Immediately after the start of (S130), command analysis is executed, so the program module placed later does not proceed, and when command analysis is no longer performed in the command analysis process (S130), the program module placed later is reached. It can be said that it is something to move forward. If, for example, a checksum calculation is performed after the command analysis determination process (S131), this process is also executed immediately after the command is received, as in the random number update process (S132). It can be said that this is a process that is not performed.

In the random number update process (S132), the lottery random number (software random number) related to the production is updated, and each time the random number update process (S132) is executed, the software random number related to the sub-main board 301 is a new value. Will be updated to. Then, the value sequentially updated in the random number update process (S132) is used as a random number for lottery in various production modes in the above-mentioned advance notice lottery management process (S128) and the like. Further, the value generated by the random number update process (S132) is for lottery after being calculated with the hardware random number for lottery of various production modes in the same manner as the generation of the predetermined random number on the main board 102 described above. It may also be used as a random number.
<< Main command reception processing >>

Next, the main command reception process from the main board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. First, it is determined whether or not to confirm the command input value (S141). Regarding command input, since there is a risk of reading failure due to noise or the like, the input value is not fixed until the same value is read two times in a row. Specifically, the command data is read up to 5 times, and when the same value is read two times in a row, the process of confirming the input value is executed. If the command input value is not fixed (S141: NO), the main command reception process is exited and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

When the command input value is confirmed (S141: YES), it is determined whether the received command is the first command (S142), and it depends on the determination result of whether it was the first command or the second command. The process branches. The main board 102 transmits a 1-byte command with one command transmission, but since the command from the main board 102 has a 2-byte configuration of MODE data and EVENT data, the command transmission is performed twice as described above. is necessary. Therefore, from the main board 102, the upper byte command (MODE command) is transmitted for the first time, and the lower byte command (EVENT command) is transmitted for the second time. Then, in the sub-main board 301 that has received the command, if the most significant bit of the command data is "1", it is determined as the first command (MODE command), and if the most significant bit is "0", the second command is determined. Judged as (EVENT command).

If the received command is the first command (S142: YES), the first command is temporarily saved (S148) and stored. Here, the temporary is a storage area for temporarily saving the value.

Further, the value of the hard random number 1 which is a predetermined hardware random number at that time is latched and held in the buffer on the software (S149), and then the process exits this main command reception process and returns to before the interrupt occurs. .. Here, the reason why the hard random number 1 is latched every time the command (first command) of the main board 102 is received as in S149 is to prevent the random number cycle from being formed. That is, a random number excluding periodicity is created by creating a numerical value by using the reception of the first command generated at a random timing and using the numerical value at that time at a predetermined lottery or the like for the production. Can be obtained.

Hardware random numbers are generated using a high-speed counter, but if the acquisition timing is not random, some periodicity may occur. However, since the first command from the main board 102 is received by the sub-main board 301 at irregular timings caused by winning a game ball or the like, there is little possibility that a cycle will occur. Therefore, in the sub-main board 301, the hardware random number is generated by utilizing the reception of the command as described above, and the periodicity as is performed in the main board 102 is eliminated.

On the other hand, in S142, when it is determined that the received command is not the first command (S142: NO), it means that the second command has been received. Then, when the second command is received, it is confirmed whether or not the first command has been received (S143). If the first command has not been received (S143: NO), the process exits the main command reception process and returns to the original process.

When the first command has been received (S143: YES), the command write pointer is acquired (S144). Here, the command light pointer indicates a reading position in the command ring buffer, and acquisition of the command light pointer acquires data from the reading position indicated by the command light pointer.

Further, the first command and the second command normally received at this point are stored in the command ring buffer for analysis processing (S145). The saved data is analyzed by the command analysis process (S130) of the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 16). Then, the command light pointer is updated (S146), and the above-mentioned temporary first command is cleared (S147). Here, updating the command write pointer is a process of updating the read position of the command ring buffer by one. Further, the process of clearing the temporary first command is to clear the first command stored in S148.

In this embodiment, the set of two element commands (first command and second command) is set as one set (one set), and the hard random number 1 is latched in response to the reception of the first command. Latch processing can be performed in a processing system (systems S148 and S149) different from the system of the processing after receiving the second command (S143 to S147), and the processing after receiving the second command can be completed quickly.
<< Sub-main timer interrupt processing >>

Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The timer interrupt process occurs every 1 ms, which is a predetermined cycle. Since this timer interrupt processing is level 1 interrupt processing having the lowest priority, first, as shown in the figure, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S161). Further, the port input process (S162) is executed, and the port data input process and output process are performed. In this port input process (S162), a process for confirming a port connected to various sensors (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, etc.) (input process) and a process connected to various devices (motor, solenoid, lamp, etc.) Information is being output (output processing) from the port.

Further, in the port input process (S162), in addition to these ports, a process related to the power supply voltage monitoring port to which a signal indicating a power failure (power failure signal) is input at the time of power failure is also performed. .. Then, when this power failure signal is input, the processing of the CPU 521 prohibits all interrupt processing and shifts to a transfer processing for backing up the stored information. The backup function of the sub-main board 301 will be described later.

Subsequently, the device control data output process (S163) is executed, and device control data output for driving various motors, solenoids, lamps, and the like is performed. For example, in the device management process (S129) of the main process shown in FIG. 16, when a drive control pattern is determined in which a predetermined motor is excited for 100 ms and then degaussed for 100 ms, this device is used. In the control data output process (S163), a time count process of 100 ms is performed.

Further, the effect timer update process (S164) is executed, and the timer value update process (S165) for measuring a predetermined timing in various effects is performed. Then, the button control timer update is executed, and the effective time management timer for managing the period during which the operation of the push button (operation button 22) is valid is updated.

Next, the update of the task control counter (S166) is executed, and the control counter (multitask counter) used for a plurality of predetermined tasks is updated. This control counter updates the count value once every 1 ms, which is the timer interrupt cycle, with 16 times as one unit. Then, in this embodiment, the task control counter counts the values from 0 to 15 in order every 1 ms, and loops the count of the values from 0 to 15.

Further, as one of the predetermined tasks, the one related to the game effect lamp can be exemplified. Many of the driving modes of the game effect lamp are performed in synchronization with the image in the effect display device 60, and the display switching of one frame (one unit image frame) of the moving image is about 16 ms or about 32 ms (about 33 ms). It is often performed in a cycle such as (sometimes) (16 ms cycle in this embodiment). Therefore, the control counter is designed so that the generation cycle of the control counter related to the game effect lamp forms a relationship such as an integral multiple or an integer 1/1 with the control unit time (16 ms or 32 ms) in the moving image display. ing. As a result, it becomes easy to design a lamp effect that matches the timing with the image.

Further, regarding the control counter, for example, if a certain process related to the game effect lamp is performed at 16 ms intervals, the process is performed at the timing when the value of the control counter becomes one predetermined value such as 3. .. Further, for the processing performed at 8ms intervals such as the image CPU runaway monitoring processing described later, the processing is performed at two timings where the difference is 8 as in the case where the control counter becomes 1 and 9. Will be done.

Further, when the cycle generated by the control counter is adjusted to a relatively short cycle such as one cycle (1 ms) of a timer interrupt (sub-main timer interrupt), it is about 30 seconds as in the control of error notification or the like. If the control for counting a relatively long time is performed, the data length to be secured for counting 30 seconds becomes long, and the number of required memories also becomes large. Therefore, the cycle of the control counter is set longer than one cycle (1 ms) of the timer interrupt, and the relationship between the control cycle related to the other superposed effects (image effects) and an integral multiple or an integral fraction. The cycle in which the control counter goes around is set to a predetermined cycle (16 ms in this case). Another use of the control counter updated in the task control counter update process (S166) is runaway monitoring (described later) for the sub-sub board 302.

Next, the image CPU runaway monitoring process (S167) is executed, and the runaway monitoring process for the image CPU of the sub-sub board 302 is performed. Here, in this embodiment, the CPU of the sub-sub board 302 is integrated with the image controller 526 in FIG. As described above, the sub-sub board 302 outputs a predetermined signal (monitoring toggle signal) that repeats on and off for each frame display of the moving image control. When the toggle signal from the sub-sub board 302 does not change continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 1600 ms corresponding to about 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that an abnormality such as a runaway of the image CPU has occurred, and the sub A reset signal (external reset signal) is transmitted from the main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302. After receiving this reset signal, the sub-sub board 302 executes a reset process (sub-main initial setting process) for initializing the state of the sub-sub board 302.

The monitoring of the toggle signal as described above is performed once for every eight timer interrupts (8 ms), as will be described later. Further, the above-mentioned control counter is used to determine that the monitoring cycle has arrived. Here, the reason why the monitoring cycle is set to 8 ms is that the monitoring is performed at a cycle shorter than the display cycle (16 ms or 32 ms) related to one frame of the image, so that the monitoring is always performed once during the display cycle of one frame. This is to be done. Further, another reason that the monitoring cycle is set to 8 ms is that the update timing of the control counter can be used by setting the monitoring cycle to 1 / integer of the cycle generated by the control counter described above. is there.

Following this image CPU runaway monitoring process (S167), an error management timer process (S168) is executed. In this error management timer processing (S168), the error management timer is subtracted, and when a timeout occurs, a predetermined processing is executed. Examples of the process at the time of timeout include the process of terminating the above-mentioned error notification. Note that this error management timer counts once for every 16 timer interrupts, and the processing related to error management using the error management timer is also one of the predetermined tasks using the control counter described above. It is one. When this error management timer processing is completed, the process returns to the original processing before the timer interrupt in the sub-main main processing (see FIG. 16). Here, since the target of interrupt permission is restricted in S161 described above, the illustration is omitted, but after all interrupts are permitted, the process returns to the main process of the sub-main.
<< Communication processing with sub-sub board >>

Next, the communication process with the above-mentioned sub-sub board 302 will be described. In command transmission (transmission of sub-main command) from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302, an interrupt (sub-communication interrupt) related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 is generated at regular intervals (here, 500 μs), and the interrupt is interrupted. This is performed by executing communication processing with the sub-sub board 302 each time. In the communication process with the sub-sub board 302, a buffer check is performed in order to confirm the existence of data to be transmitted, and if there is data, this data is read. Then, the read data is set in the transmission buffer, the settings related to command transmission are updated, and the communication process with the sub-sub is completed.
<< Command transmission / reception management processing >>

Further, when the sub-main board 301 transmits a command to the sub-sub board 302, the above-mentioned reception command (sub-sub command) indicating that the command (sub-main command) can be normally received from the sub-sub board 302 side is sub-main. It is transmitted to the board 301 side. In this command transmission / reception management process, the command is read, the command analysis is executed, and then the command is saved. When receiving a sub-sub command, command reception interrupt processing is executed on the sub-sub board 302. For this command reception interrupt processing, set a flag for executing command reception interrupt processing in the above-mentioned sub communication interrupt. Is executed by. That is, since the input of the sub-sub command from the sub-sub board 302 occurs after the transmission of the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, the command reception interrupt processing is performed incidentally to the processing related to the sub-communication interrupt. It has become something to be said.
<< Control processing on the sub-sub board >>

In the sub-sub board 302, similarly to the sub-main board 301, the sub-sub initial setting process started after the power is turned on, the main process executed after the sub-sub initial setting process, and the sub-sub timer interrupt generated in a predetermined cycle with respect to the main process. The timer interrupt process executed in connection with the above, the sub-main command reception process which is the interrupt process generated in connection with the reception of the sub-main command, and the like are executed. Of these, in the sub-main command reception process, when the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 is received, the above-mentioned reception command (sub-sub command) indicating that the sub-main command has been normally received is transmitted. Will be executed.
<Relationship between the basic specifications of the Pachinko game machine and the production>

Next, the basic specifications (specifications) of the pachinko game machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the effects combined with these specifications will be described. First, the basic specifications described here are one aspect of what is considered optimal for application to the techniques described below. In the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of a big hit (big hit probability) is about 1/319 in the normal time and about 1 / 46.8 in the high probability in both the special figures 1 and the special figure 2. (See FIG. 8 (a)). Further, the pachinko game machine 10 is a so-called probability variation loop machine in which probability variation may occur repeatedly with a predetermined probability, and the probability that probability variation is repeated (probability variation loop probability) is the same for both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. It is said to be 65%.

FIG. 19 shows an outline of the game flow in the pachinko game machine 10 according to the present embodiment by a flowchart (game flow). First, the game is performed based on the normal mode shown in the middle left of FIG. The jackpot probability in this normal mode is defined as the jackpot probability in FIG. 1, and its value is about 1/319 as described above. Then, the effect pattern executed in the normal mode is also selected from those for the normal mode.

The big hit that can occur in this normal mode can be the first big hit, and in this embodiment, as the big hit that can occur as the first hit, as shown in the upper part of the left and right center in FIG. There are three types, the second big hit and the third big hit. Of these, the first jackpot is named a mission bonus in this embodiment, and in this first jackpot (mission bonus), only either 5R normal or 5R probability variation occurs. Then, in this embodiment, the probability of occurrence of the 5R probability variation due to the first big hit (mission bonus) and the probability of occurrence of the normal 5R are both 35%.

The above-mentioned second jackpot is named a hyper bonus in this embodiment, and in this second jackpot (hyper bonus), a probability change (here, 7 symbols) is accompanied by a predetermined number of production symbols (7 symbols in this case). Only 15R probability variation) occurs, and the probability of occurrence is 5%. Further, in the above-mentioned third big hit, only the probability change (here, 2R probability change) in the mode of sudden probability change (sudden probability) described later occurs, and the probability of occurrence is 25%. That is, as the first hit, the 5R normal or 5R probability variation of the first big hit (mission bonus) occurs with a probability of 70% (= 35% + 35%), and the second big hit (hyper bonus) occurs with a probability of 5%. However, the third big hit (probability) has a 25% probability of occurring. The first hit probability shown here assumes a normal (low probability, non-time saving) gaming state, and assumes a jackpot distribution probability in the special symbol 1 (see FIG. 9). ).

The above-mentioned third big hit (probability) is a so-called big hit without a ball, which makes it difficult for the player to get a ball, and a special effect indicating the progress of the round is not executed. Then, even if the third big hit is a probability change hit, the special effect related to the round progress is not executed, the special game is completed in a relatively short time, and the game shifts to the game in the probability change state. ..

If the above-mentioned first jackpot (mission bonus) is a probability variation hit, or if a second jackpot (hyper bonus) or a third jackpot (probability) occurs, a specific game state (first) after the end of the special game 1 The state of the specific game). This first specific game state (first rush) is an effect mode provided mainly as a so-called sub-mode for the game in FIG. 2, and the details thereof will be described later.

When the first jackpot (mission bonus) occurs out of the above-mentioned first jackpot to third jackpot, it should be immediately specified whether the jackpot is probable or normal during the special game. The production is not executed. That is, when the first big hit (mission bonus) occurs, the effect is executed without displaying or sound output for clearly indicating to the player whether or not it was a probability variation hit.

Furthermore, in the production during the special game related to the first big hit (mission bonus), the production diverges following the story of whether or not the characters or the like succeed in a predetermined mission (meaning of mission, mission, etc.). Then, if the mission is successful, the process shifts to the above-mentioned production of the first specific gaming state (first rush), and if it fails, the production of the special zone (special zone production) shown in the upper left of FIG. ) To shift (fall). This special zone is a special stage limited to 20 fluctuations, and in the special zone, the above-mentioned limited frequency pattern effect is executed. Then, if a big hit does not occur while the game state is in the special zone, the mode shifts (falls) to the above-mentioned normal mode as shown in FIG.

Here, during the special game related to the first big hit (mission bonus), the number of times of the production (mission success / failure fanning production) for inspiring the player to expect the transition to the first specific gaming state (first rush) is performed. , For example, once, it is conceivable to set the number of times relatively small.

Further, as a production (round production) during the special game when the above-mentioned second big hit (hyper bonus) occurs, for example, a video (demo movie) related to the second big hit (hyper bonus) is started as a special game. It is conceivable to display continuously from to the end. As this demo movie, it is conceivable to adopt the one created for the Pachinko game machine 10. In addition, when a story related to the production, such as a movie or a manga (comic), is adopted, as the above-mentioned demo movie, a predetermined scene of the movie or a video obtained by converting the manga into image data. It is also possible to output. Furthermore, as a round effect related to the second big hit (hyper bonus), in the fluctuation that becomes a big hit, by setting the effect symbol that stops in doublet to a predetermined symbol ("7"), the mode shifts to the mode corresponding to the probability change. Is implicitly (or clearly) shown, it is conceivable not to give the player an effect (mission success / failure effect) to incite the expectation of transition to the first specific game state.

In addition, as the effect during the special game when the third big hit (probability) occurs, the one provided as the effect for opening and closing the big winning opening (91, 92) for a very short time is executed. Is possible. Further, as an effect during the special game related to the third big hit (probability), it is conceivable to execute an effect indicating the transition to the first rush.

When the above-mentioned 2nd jackpot (hyper bonus) or 3rd jackpot (probability) occurs, the production is not branched like the 1st jackpot (mission bonus) after the production related to the special game is completed. The process shifts to the production of the first specific gaming state (first rush) described above. It can be said that such a transition mode of the production directly hits the production of the first specific gaming state (first rush) based on the difference from the production transition mode such as the first big hit (mission bonus).

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned first specific gaming state is named "first rush" as described above (see the upper right corner in FIG. 19). Then, in this first rush, the game according to the special figure 2 using the second start winning opening (63) is executed by the above-mentioned right-handed hit. The jackpot probability of Special Figure 2 in the probabilistic state is about 1 / 46.8 in this embodiment. Furthermore, the first rush continues until the next big hit. Therefore, the first rush is a game mode in which the specific game state continues so-called 100% until the next big hit is acquired. Here, the "first rush" can also be the name of the effect related to the first specific gaming state.

In addition, most of the fluctuation patterns of the special symbols selected during the first rush are those with an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds), except for limited cases as described later. ing. Such an extremely short time variation pattern can be referred to as, for example, an "ultra-short variation" variation pattern or an "ultra-short variation" variation pattern. Then, in the present embodiment, most of the effect patterns selected based on the fluctuation pattern during the first rush are those with an extremely short fluctuation time.

Here, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol (190) during the first rush, for example, the effect symbol (190) is made transparent (or translucent) at the start of the change, and the transparency is lowered during the change. As an example, the player stops as soon as the player can clearly see it.

Furthermore, the jackpot that occurs during the first rush is 15R probability variation, 10R probability variation, 7R probability variation, 10R normal, if the player is playing a game mainly with the special symbol 2 as expected at the time of design. It is either 7R normal or 5R normal. The probability of occurrence of each jackpot (the jackpot distribution probability of the special symbol 2) is 45% for the 15R probability variation, 10% for both the 10R probability variation and the 7R probability variation, and 5% for both the 10R normal and 7R normal. Is 25% (see FIG. 9b). Here, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided for the special figure 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit may be provided for the special figure 2. It is also possible not to provide a small hit for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or to provide a small hit only for the special figure 2.

The jackpot generated in the first rush is the fourth jackpot, as shown in the lower right of FIG. This 4th jackpot is named a battle bonus which is a special bonus in this embodiment, and as a production during the special game related to this 4th jackpot (battle bonus), various battle productions in which the characters fight are performed. It is supposed to be executed. Here, the "battle production" can be regarded as a wide range of production modes that can be expressed as, for example, battle, confrontation, challenge, and the like. In addition, the battle production is also a kind of mission because it is a production method that notifies the player of success or failure by "victory" and "defeat", and does not necessarily generate only "battle production", but as a modification of 1. Depending on the degree of expectation of probability change, the "mission production" may be performed at the fourth big hit. For example, in order to increase the winning percentage of the player-side character (hero) in the battle production, it is conceivable to control the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot so that the mission bonus is easily displayed when the normal jackpot is subtracted.

If the 4th big hit (battle bonus) is a 15R probability change, the above-mentioned 1st rush is executed again after the end of the special game. Then, after that, the above-mentioned fourth jackpot (battle bonus) is executed according to the type of jackpot that has occurred. If the 4th jackpot (battle bonus) is a jackpot other than the 15R probability variation, as shown in the lower center of the left and right in FIG. 19, the 2nd specific game state (2nd rush) depends on the type of jackpot. ) Or the specific gaming state of either the third specific gaming state (third rush). In addition, when a jackpot that is a 15R probability change is acquired in a specific game state, it is clearly indicated to the player by stopping a specific symbol such as "7 (* the character string of" Hyper "is added to the symbol)" as a production symbol. , Complete the battle production during the battle bonus in a winning manner.

Of these, the second specific gaming state (second rush) is executed when the fourth big hit (battle bonus) is any one of 10R probability variation, 7R probability variation, 10R normal, and 7R normal. Further, in this second specific game state (second rush), there are cases where a probability change (and time reduction) is given until the next big hit, and there are cases where only 100 times time reduction is given. In the second specific game state (second rush), the continuation rate of the specific game (probability of drawing a big hit during the specific game) is 76%. Here, "second rush" can also be the name of the effect related to the second specific gaming state. In addition, the "second rush" is an effect mode (sub mode) that is controlled only during the 100 fluctuation periods after the big hit, and if there is a high probability internally, it will always be from the 101st fluctuation. In addition to controlling the transition to the "first rush", in a gaming state where a promotion effect to the "first rush" can be output when a limited frequency pattern or a specific fluctuation pattern is selected in the middle of 100 fluctuation periods. There is, at the moment of being controlled by the "second rush" as a player, it is a so-called "hidden" gaming state in which it is unclear whether the lottery is internally performed with a high probability or with a low probability. In addition, if you get a big hit (10R probability change, 10R normal, 7R probability change, 7R normal) that will shift to "2nd rush", the symbols other than "7" will be stopped as the production symbols and the battle bonus will be in progress. In the battle production of, complete the production in a winning manner.

The above-mentioned third specific game state (third rush) is executed when the fourth big hit (battle bonus) is 5R normal. Further, in this third specific game state (third rush), only 100 time reductions are given, and the continuation rate of the specific game is 27%. Here, the "third rush" can also be the name of the effect related to the third specific gaming state. In addition, if a big hit (5R normal) that shifts to the "third rush" is acquired during a specific game, all but "7" will stop as the production symbol, and the battle production during the battle bonus will be completed with the production of the defeat mode. Let me.

As mentioned above, the probability of becoming a big hit (probability of winning the battle bonus) to shift to the first rush and the second rush is 5R normal (25%) in the game of special figure 2 which is the main game during the specific game. The probability of winning other than is 75%, and the probability of becoming a big hit to move to the third rush is 25%, which is the probability of winning 5R normal. In a pachinko game machine that generates a general battle bonus, since control is performed to shift to two different modes after victory and defeat, the probability of probability change (15R probability change, 10R probability change, and 7R probability change in this embodiment) 65. %) Can only be output with a probability of winning the main character, but as in this example, a second rush (a production mode in which the main character wins and shifts to either a probable big hit or a normal big hit) is provided. Therefore, the probability that the effect of the winning mode can be output during the battle bonus can be made higher (75%) than the probability change probability (65%), which is disadvantageous for the player in the situation where the ball is obtained during the big hit. It is possible to reduce the execution of notifications in which a certain situation is determined, and to give the player the impression that the main character is strong.

When a big hit does not occur during these second rushes (low accuracy) or the third rush and the second specific game state or the third specific game state ends (when the time is shortened), the left middle row in FIG. Shifts (falls) to the normal mode shown in. Further, the mode of the effect (second rush or third rush) performed during the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state is also a kind of submode as in the above-mentioned first rush. Although defined as the first to third specific game states for convenience, the state in the main control means (here, the main board 102) of the second specific game state is the first specific game state, which is probabilistic until the next time. It is the same as any of the third specific gaming states, which is a time-saving gaming state (low probability) of 100 times. Including the viewpoint of whether or not to use the variable pattern selection state (limited frequency) as the game state, the details will be described later, but the second specific game state is the first and third game states in the 100 game period. It can be said that the game state is different from that of.

Further, in the present embodiment, 100 times of time reduction may be given to the 5R normal jackpot of the normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) included in the special figure 1. As a case where 100 times of time reduction is given, when a 5R normal jackpot is obtained in special figure 1 during a specific game state (“big hit related to special figure 1 in a special situation” described later occurs. ) Can be exemplified. By doing so, the game of Special Figure 1 which is not assumed as the main game is performed in the specific game state, so that the player does not get the profit of shortening the time, or the specific game is specified. It is possible to control to output a consistent jackpot effect as a jackpot effect during a specific game by applying the battle effect as it is to the jackpot in Special Figure 1 as the jackpot effect during the game state. In this case, the battle victory effect is output in the 15R probability variation and the 5R probability variation in Special Figure 1, and the battle defeat effect is output in the 5R normal. In addition, in the sudden hit (2R probability change) of Special Figure 1, the time to make the battle effect appear and the message such as "Returning to the state" and "Please wait for a while" are displayed to the player because it is not assumed to get the ball. We will carry out a production that encourages waiting. Further, the number of time reductions for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not limited to 100 times, and for example, 20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 80 times and the like can be adopted. Furthermore, it is also possible to give different time reduction times depending on the type of hit.

The above-mentioned first jackpot (mission bonus) is referred to as, for example, "mission jackpot", and the other second jackpot (hyper bonus) and third jackpot (probability) are "non-mission jackpot", "non-mission bonus", etc. It is possible to call it. Further, the fourth jackpot (battle bonus) can be referred to as, for example, a "battle jackpot". Furthermore, the fourth jackpot (battle bonus) can be included in the "mission jackpot" and the "mission bonus".

In addition, it is also possible to adopt the content in which a person who engages in a game or a battle appears as a story in the production during the special game related to the first jackpot (mission bonus). In this case, the first jackpot is "battle". It can also be called a "bonus".

Further, the first rush can be referred to as, for example, a "probability variation determination mode" or a "high accuracy high base mode". Further, the second rush can be referred to as, for example, "latent time reduction mode" and "latent high base mode", and the third rush can be referred to as, for example, "low probability confirmation mode" and "low probability high base mode". ..
<Outline of production related to special games>

Next, the basic specifications and effects of the special game in the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, it is assumed that one round ends with 10 balls entering (so-called 10 counts), and the shortest round is about 6 seconds. That is, if the rate of fire (frequency of fire) of the game ball is set to the maximum degree (for example, 100 shots) that does not exceed 100 shots per minute, the minimum for 10 balls to enter the big winning opening (91 or 92). However, it takes a time equivalent to 6 seconds, which is the time required to launch 10 balls.

In addition, when a big hit of 15R (15R probability change here) occurs, the minimum time that can be entered is 90 seconds (= 6 seconds x 15R), and the entire period of the special game (for example, the start demo starts to the end demo ends). The time until) is about 100 seconds. Then, in this embodiment, the period of the start demonstration is extremely short, about 0 to 2 seconds.

Furthermore, regarding the round production when a big hit of 15R occurs, for example, in the big hit start demo and the 1st and 2nd R, the big hit name display is, for example, "○○ bonus", "battle bonus", etc. Characters (enemy characters) who will be the opponents of missions and battles will appear. Then, in the 3rd round, a production in which a character (own character) such as the main character who is the opponent of the enemy character attacks, and a production in which a friendly character (friend character) who fights with the own character joins (joining production). Is done. Here, a round production in which a battle is performed by the own character or an enemy character can be referred to as a "round battle production" or the like.

In addition, in the 4th R, the production in which the own character and the enemy character, and the ally character and the enemy character shoot each other is performed, and in the 5th R, the production in which the own character and the ally character win the battle (winning production) However, it is performed as a production that fuels the expectations of the player, such as progress to the next round transition and promotion to probabilistic change (also called development fanning production, promotion fanning production, etc.). Here, the production at this time may be such that the own character and the ally character jointly fight against the enemy character. Furthermore, on the 6th and 7th rounds, for example, a production is performed to praise the player's profits (suggestion that the ball is released and the expectation for the probabilistic state is high) such as "victory !!" A display such as "Sorry ..." is displayed to indicate that the profit of the specific game (probability change) was not obtained. At this time, it is also possible to perform an effect in which the movable effect member (93, 94, etc.) as described above performs a predetermined operation. It is also possible to provide a movable effect member that imitates a device related to a battle, and to operate this movable effect member in a battle scene up to the 5th round.

Further, from the 8th round onward, it is possible to output a predetermined song and display a scene in which the own character or the ally character is pleased, a recollection scene associated with the own character or the ally character, or the like. In addition, as described above, when a story related to the production, such as a movie or a manga (comic), is adopted, a predetermined scene of the movie or a video obtained by converting the manga into image data is output. It is also possible to do. Then, when the opening of the 15th R is completed and the end demo period is reached, a display such as "Enter XX mode" or "Continue XX mode" is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, depending on the subsequent game mode). Execute (about 3 to 5 seconds).

FIG. 20A exemplifies in chronological order and schematically an example relating to a series of game states and effects related to such a special game. The upper part in FIG. 20A shows the state detected in the main (main board 102), and the lower part shows the outline of the effect corresponding to the main state. For example, in the situation where the main shown in the upper row is recognized as the situation of the big hit start demonstration, the effect by the sub-main board 301 is the display of the big hit start (bonus display).

Further, when the first round of the special game is started in the main, in the example of FIG. 20A, the battle effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Further, the special game progresses from the 1st R to the 6th R, the button effect as described above (described as "button" in FIG. 20A) is executed, and the button operation by the player is detected. In this case, if the effect is developed, a predetermined movable effect member (93, 94, etc.) is activated here, and the effect of winning the battle is executed.

In the example of FIG. 20A, the special game after the 7th round is in progress during this period, and when the final special game of the 15th round is completed, the main is in the state of the jackpot end demo. After that, the game state shifts to the first rush here. At this time, as the production, the production after the battle victory and the production indicating the transition to the first rush (here, referred to as "other production") are executed, and in the big hit end demonstration after the end of the special game, the background Migration etc. are executed.

Here, in this embodiment, the result of victory or defeat may be displayed earlier than the normal production as shown in FIG. 20A. Then, in this case, for example, it is conceivable that the effect (winning effect) in which the own character or the ally character wins is performed at the timing of the 4th R or 5R. Further, in these cases, as shown in FIG. 20B, the above-mentioned effects after the 7th round can be carried forward to the 5th and 6th rounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, it is possible to perform the timing of the button effect at an early timing of the battle effect and shift to the battle victory effect triggered by the button operation. Further, although not shown, it is possible to perform the button effect multiple times both before the battle effect and after the battle effect.
<Outline of the production related to the first rush>

Next, the above-mentioned first rush (submode 1) will be described more specifically. First, during the first rush, most of the effects are performed by the fluctuation pattern of the extremely short fluctuation time as described above. In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern during the first rush is provided so that the fluctuation is performed 40 times on average per minute. The frequency of occurrence of such variable games (also referred to as the progress speed of the games) can be referred to as, for example, "SA40".

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns (disengagement fluctuations) selected in the case of deviation during the first rush are provided, but most (for example, 95%) fluctuations are 0.6 seconds. It is a pattern. Further, among the fluctuation patterns in this out-of-range fluctuation, the one with the longest fluctuation time has a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and other fluctuation patterns of 1 second, 1.5 seconds, and 2 seconds are provided. .. Then, the ratio of these fluctuation patterns in the total deviation fluctuation is, for example, 1 second is 2%, 1.5 seconds is 1.5%, 2 seconds is 1.0%, and 3 seconds is 0.5%. It is conceivable to do.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) also has a fluctuation time of 0.6 seconds to 3 seconds, and it is specified that all the production symbols are stopped almost at the same time without performing the reach effect (stop timing is). There may be a situation where the two symbols are formally heard (reach) with a slight shift, but the design does not clearly notify that it is reach, such as the utterance of "reach"), and the design for the production symbol (190) The fixed stop time (the fixed time of the symbol related to the effect symbol) is set to be relatively longer than the deviation fluctuation. For example, it is conceivable that the symbol fixing time of the deviation fluctuation is 0.5 seconds, and the symbol fixing time of the hit fluctuation is 3 seconds or the like. Then, this relatively long fixed symbol time can be used as a period for adding a symbol effect (applying a symbol effect) as if to congratulate the effect symbol (190). In addition, the time required to execute the symbol effect can be determined in relation to the fixed symbol time. For example, when the symbol fixing time is 0.5 seconds (when it is off), the time required for the symbol effect is set to 0.6 seconds, and the start timing of the symbol effect and the symbol fixing time is the same. Since the symbol effect is executed after the symbol fixed time is exceeded, it is possible to set the symbol effect to 0.5 seconds so as to be within the symbol fixed time. Here, the fixed symbol time at the time of hitting is, for example, 3 seconds, and is used as a period of the above-mentioned symbol effect and the effect (afterglow effect) such as fanfare.

Further, the ratio of the fluctuation time of these hit fluctuations is set to, for example, 0.6 seconds is 10%, 1 second is 10%, 1.5 seconds is 10%, 2 seconds is 40%, and 3 seconds. Is considered to be 30% or the like. Then, depending on the relationship between the composition of the fluctuation time of these out-of-range fluctuations and the composition of the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation and the jackpot probability during the first rush (here, 1 / about 46.8), it is approximately 1 for the player. I try to give the image that it hits with a little over.

That is, since the jackpot probability during the first rush is about 1 / 46.8, theoretically, the probability that a jackpot can occur at a rate of once in about 47 games (47 rotations), which is the probability denominator, is It is about 63% (calculated from the value excluding the probability that a big hit cannot be drawn 47 times in a row). Then, as described above, in this embodiment, since the game proceeds at a speed of SA40 (= 40 rotations / minute), 47 rotations takes less than 1 minute and 15 seconds (more specifically). 1 minute 12 seconds = 60 seconds x 47 rotations / 40 rotations) is required. Therefore, it can be said that the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment can draw most of the big hits in about 1 minute and 15 seconds during the first rush. Here, when the above-mentioned "probability denominator" is considered as "within the probability denominator", the above-mentioned "47 times" can be replaced with "46 times". In addition, the following explanation can be given in relation to such a probability denominator. For example, the sum of the fluctuation time (0.6 seconds, etc.) related to one fluctuation of the effect symbol 190 and the fixed symbol time (0.5 seconds, etc.), which is the stop display time of the effect symbol 190, is "variation interval". The probability of a big hit is expressed as a fraction (1/319, 1 / 46.8, etc.) with the numerator as 1, and the next big hit occurs from the end of the special game related to the previous big hit. The period up to is the "big hit interval time". Then, assuming that the above-mentioned jackpot interval time is a value obtained by the product of a numerical value (46.8 or the like) that is the denominator of the fraction and an expected value (1.1 seconds or the like) of the fluctuation interval time, the jackpot is assumed. The time (about 100 seconds, etc.) in which the interval time (50.6 seconds (46 x 1.1 seconds, etc.)) is controlled to the special game when the most advantageous special game for the player (15R probability variation, etc.) is performed. ) Can be shorter.

Further, of the special figures 1 and 2, the variation pattern table (time saving and medium variation pattern table) related to the limited frequency pattern effect is not used at the time of the first rush transition. Then, at the time of transition to the first rush, it is also possible to use a normal time saving / medium fluctuation pattern table that is not for the limited frequency pattern effect.

Here, as the normal time-saving and medium-time fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern table used during the above-mentioned third rush can be exemplified. Then, the fluctuation pattern defined in the fluctuation pattern table used during the third rush is associated with a dedicated effect pattern selected during the first rush, and the same fluctuation pattern table as the third rush is used. , It is conceivable that the production pattern for the first rush is selected. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated time saving / medium fluctuation pattern table for selection during the first rush may be provided.
<Look-ahead production related to the first rush>

Next, various look-ahead effects in the first rush will be described. First, as an example of the look-ahead effect, a symbol effect (design effect notice) as described above can be mentioned. As the symbol effect, various examples such as illuminating each of the effect symbols 190a to 190c only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds) can be exemplified. Then, as a look-ahead effect by the symbol effect, for example, if the symbol effect is applied when the fluctuation is stopped due to the fluctuation immediately before that time, the development of the production and the expectation of the big hit are increased in the fluctuation of the time. It is conceivable to control.

In addition, if the symbol effect is continuously applied when the fluctuation is stopped over a plurality of fluctuations, it is conceivable that the development of the production and the expectation of a big hit will increase in the fluctuations of each time. Furthermore, if the fluctuation to which the symbol effect is applied is repeated a plurality of times in succession and the number of repetitions is, for example, 3 or 4 times, the degree of expectation for the development of the production and the jackpot will increase in the fluctuation of each time. It is possible to control the effect depending on the mode. Here, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holds is 4, so when the hold 4 occurs as a trigger hold, the look-ahead effect can be performed up to 3 times, excluding the changes that have already been displayed as fluctuations. It becomes the basis. However, if the look-ahead is performed when the symbol is stopped (immediately before the end of the fluctuation), such as a symbol effect, the effect is replaced so that the effect is generated when the symbol of the fluctuation is stopped at a predetermined timing during the symbol fluctuation at the time of the occurrence of the protection 4. By doing this, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect up to 4 times. Here, as the above-mentioned "predetermined timing during symbol variation", an example may be made before transmission of a symbol stop instruction command (here, a symbol 2 effect pattern stop command, etc.) to the image control CPU (here, the sub-main CPU).

In addition, regarding the symbol effect when the fluctuation is stopped each time, the more the number of times the shining and the number of times the bright spot circulates (the number of repetitions during the production) increase, for example, 2 times or 3 times, the more the development of the production and the big hit are related. It is also possible to control the effect in such a way that the degree of expectation increases. Furthermore, it is also possible to control the effect in a manner that increases the chance according to the amount (small, large), color (blue, red) of the symbol effect.

Here, in this embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of holds is 4, when the hold 4 occurs as a trigger hold, the look-ahead effect is basically performed up to 3 times. However, if the look-ahead is performed when the symbol is stopped (immediately before the end of the fluctuation), such as a symbol effect, the effect is replaced so that the effect is generated when the symbol of the fluctuation is stopped at a predetermined timing during the symbol fluctuation at the time of the occurrence of the protection 4. By doing this, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect up to 4 times. Here, as the above-mentioned "predetermined timing during symbol variation", an example may be made before transmission of a symbol stop instruction command (here, a symbol 2 effect pattern stop command, etc.) to the image control CPU (here, the sub-main CPU).

Next, a bullet hole notice, which is one of the look-ahead effects, will be described. In this bullet hole notice, a glass plate is placed in a predetermined area (for example, the whole or most of) of the screen, and an image display effect is performed as if a bullet was shot into the glass plate, which is illustrated in FIG. 21 (a). As a result, the display of the state in which the bullet hits the glass plate and the bullet mark (bullet hole image 181) is attached is executed. Further, the bullet hole image 181 is started to be displayed at the start of fluctuation of the effect symbols 190a to 190c.

Here, when the effect symbols 190a to 190c are performed using the center of the screen, it is considered that the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the bullet hole image 181 overlap, and the visibility of the effect symbols 190a to 190c is lowered. However, it is possible to prevent the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the bullet hole image 181 from overlapping by displaying the effect symbols 190a to 190c in a smaller size in the upper corner of the screen or the like. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in visibility by erasing the bullet hole image 181 when the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped. It should be noted that the “when stopped” of the effect symbols 190a to 190c here can include not only the fixed stop but also the temporary stop.

In this bullet hole notice, the number of images displayed as bullet holes increases or the shape changes depending on the degree of expectation. It should be noted that the bullet hole notice is also designed so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of fluctuations overlaps, and the number may increase as the number of fluctuations increases. In the example of FIG. 21 (a), a state in which the bullet hole notice has been performed over three fluctuations is shown. Further, in the bullet hole notice, the number of times is represented by the number of bullet holes, and when the number of bullet holes is relatively large, the effect control is performed so that the expectation for the development of the effect and the big hit is high. Then, it is controlled to execute a notice effect equivalent to the bullet hole notice in the fluctuation in the trigger hold, and when the number of bullet holes reaches, for example, 4 or more, the state that the glass plate is broken is represented by a display or a sound (display alone is also possible). ), The jackpot symbol (combination of three digits of the production symbols 190a to 190c) is displayed, and the main character (when the jackpot symbol is "7", that is, when the probability change is confirmed or the maximum R jackpot is established) or the enemy character in the battle bonus ( It is also possible to perform production control in such a manner that a jackpot symbol "7") appears. Regarding the fluctuation pattern of the trigger fluctuation at this time, it is decided to execute the bullet hole notice based on the fact that, for example, a fluctuation pattern of 2 seconds or 3 seconds is selected instead of an ultra-short fluctuation of about 0.6 seconds. It is desirable to draw lots.

Next, a countdown notice, which is one of the look-ahead effects, will be described. In this countdown notice, a countdown display such as "3", "2", "1", and "0" is performed for each change. At this time, it is also possible to output sounds such as "three", "two", "one", and "zero". Then, if the production proceeds to "1", the production is performed in a control mode such that the big hit is confirmed by the next fluctuation. In the above example, the fluctuation in which "0" is displayed is a notice executed in the fluctuation of the trigger hold which is a big hit, and is a series of continuous notices as a countdown notice, but strictly speaking, it is not a look-ahead effect. Further, in the above-mentioned example, the jackpot is confirmed by displaying "1", but it may be designed so that the display of "1" is provided with a pattern that becomes a false pattern (trigger hold is removed).

This countdown notice is different in nature from the above-mentioned symbol effect and bullet hole notice in that the big hit is confirmed if the notice progresses to "1". In other words, while the above-mentioned symbol effects and bullet hole notices only increase the expectation of the development of the production and the large winning price if the number of times the production is executed increases, the number of countdown notices is a predetermined number. It is a production that will be a big hit if it reaches. Then, in this embodiment, a type of look-ahead effect such as the above-mentioned symbol effect and bullet hole notice and a type of effect such as a countdown notice different from these are provided.

Further, in this embodiment, since the main fluctuation pattern during the first rush is an ultra-short fluctuation, the time required for so-called hold digestion is shortened. For this reason, it can be assumed that a relatively large number of situations occur in which the number of reservations remains at 1 to 3 without reaching the upper limit of 4. However, with regard to pre-reading notices that have the property that expectations for development etc. increase as the number of repetitions increases, such as the above-mentioned symbol effects and bullet hole notices, that is, big hit expectations are expected by repeating 3 times or 4 times according to the maximum number of holds. As for the effect of increasing the degree, the number of repetitions of the effect does not reach 3 or 4, and the chances of effectively executing the effect are reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned pre-reading effect of the hold change and the countdown notice occurs regardless of the number of holds 1 to 4, but the bullet hole notice and the symbol effect will be described later. The effect control is performed so as to limit the generation of the effect depending on the number of holds.

In addition, the symbol effect and the look-ahead effect of the bullet hole notice are not selected unless the number of hold has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3) (prohibition is set or the number of hold is set). If there are two or less, only the outliers will be selected in the look-ahead execution lottery). As for the pattern effect and the look-ahead effect of the bullet hole notice, the effect pattern of the design effect and the look-ahead effect of the bullet hole notice when the number of reservations is 0 to 2 is not provided, and the number of holds is 0 to 2. In this situation, the design effect and the look-ahead effect of the bullet hole notice are not decided.

Next, the look-ahead effect performed in relation to the effect during the first rush and the pending change will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, the orange hold display is adopted as the display mode in the basic color for the special figure 2, and when the hold change is performed, the red, gold, and rainbow colors are used. , It is possible to display with a predetermined pattern or the like. Then, in this embodiment, the character display may be performed as one of the modes of the pending change during the first rush.

For example, as a mode of hold change, a look-ahead hold display (enemy character hold) using an enemy character may be performed. In this enemy character hold, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the image of the face of the enemy character that appears during the round production at the time of a big hit is displayed on hold related to the change (here, the change in special figure 2). It can be done by using as. That is, in the example of FIG. 21 (b), the enemy character A (ho 1) and the enemy character B (ho 3) appearing during the round production at the time of a big hit as the hold display (here, the display of Ho 1 and Ho 3). The image is used in the form of an order book for finding enemy characters A and B. Then, if the hold on which the effect of holding the enemy character is performed is exhausted and a big hit occurs at the time of fluctuation, the enemy character used for holding the enemy character will appear in the round production during the special game. , A production that fights against your own character and ally characters is executed.

Here, based on the type of jackpot symbol determined on the side of the main board 102 for holding the enemy character, whether or not the holding of the enemy character is executed and the type of the enemy character are drawn on the side of the sub-main board 301. It is conceivable to do. Furthermore, it is conceivable to determine the content of the round effect (type of enemy character to appear, effect pattern, etc.) according to the determined enemy character related to the hold of the enemy character. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the enemy character appearing in the round production is determined first, and the display mode of the enemy character hold is determined based on the determined enemy character.

Further, as another mode of the hold change, although not shown, a look-ahead hold display using a ally character (friend character hold) may be performed. This ally character hold is performed, for example, by using the image of the face of the ally character who joins during the round production at the time of a big hit as the hold display, as in the case of the enemy character hold (see FIG. 21B). Is possible. Then, the ally character hold can be used for a production in which the ally character used for the ally character hold is confirmed as a ally character to join in the round production when a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation related to the hold digestion. is there.

Here, such an enemy character hold and an ally character hold are not limited to the look-ahead effect, but can also be used, for example, as an effect related to a predetermined game section (also referred to as a "zone" or "game zone"). .. For example, it is possible to exemplify a situation in which the game mode enters a predetermined zone and a unified effect is executed so that it can be recognized that the game mode has entered the zone over a predetermined plurality of fluctuations. Furthermore, while the game state is in such a zone, for example, in the case of the ally character zone, "○○ is participating in the war", and in the case of the enemy character zone, "○○ is approaching". It may be displayed. Here, "○○" represents the name of a ally character or an enemy character. If a big hit occurs while being controlled by the zone state, the corresponding character is made to appear as a confluence of ally characters or an opponent as a production during the big hit, as in the case of character hold.

Then, while the game state is in the zone (friendly character), if the enemy character is held due to any change, if a big hit occurs due to the change when the enemy character hold is exhausted, a special game It is conceivable to perform production control in such a way that it is confirmed that the combined production of the enemy character and the ally character appearing in the round production of the time is output.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 21B, a look-ahead notice of the change in the holding frame is performed. In the pre-reading notice of the change of the holding frame, the holding frame 182 surrounding the holding number display unit (here, the second holding number display unit 197) is displayed. Then, when the coloring of the hold frame 182 changes from blue, which is the basic display mode, to yellow, red, gold, etc., the effect control is performed in such a manner that it suggests that there is a hold with high expectations for the development of the effect and the jackpot. Will be done.

It is also possible to use the various aspects of the look-ahead effect described so far not as a look-ahead effect but as a pseudo look-ahead notice as described above. For example, for some of the effects executed by various look-ahead effects, when a hold that does not execute look-ahead (not a trigger hold) becomes a big hit, a notice lottery (during change) is performed at the start of the change. In a lottery for determining various advance notice effects), it is possible to determine the execution of the same or substantially the same effect as a part of the look-ahead effect. More specifically, the above-mentioned countdown notice mode, which is a look-ahead effect, is used as a pseudo look-ahead notice. In the pseudo look-ahead notice corresponding to the countdown notice, in the fluctuation that becomes a big hit, the count such as "3" or "2" is displayed within the range of the number that matches the remaining number of holds or is less than the remaining number of holds. It is possible to exemplify such things as controlling the production mode so that the fluctuation becomes a big hit.

By giving such a pseudo-continuous notice, the player is made to think that "Oh, look-ahead has started", "Something may happen in the next few fluctuations", etc., and at that time It is possible to perform a so-called law-breaking effect in which a hit is suddenly displayed within the fluctuation. Then, both the countdown notice as a genuine look-ahead effect and the countdown notice as a pseudo look-ahead effect can be executed, and the number of production patterns is determined so that the countdown notice as a genuine look-ahead effect is executed more frequently. By doing so, it is possible to use the countdown notice as a pseudo look-ahead effect as an exception effect (law breaking effect) to the countdown notice as a genuine look-ahead effect.

The law-breaking effect is a pre-reading notice, such as a design effect or a bullet hole notice, in which the degree of expectation rises depending on the number of repetitions, but a countdown notice in which the effect progresses for each fluctuation (step up as another example). It is desirable to be able to execute a pseudo look-ahead notice for a look-ahead notice that is easy for the player to guess at the start stage of the production at what timing there is a possibility of a big hit.

Further, it is possible to adopt a control mode such that the effect of breaking the law is performed only when the fluctuation is a big hit and the big hit returns to the first rush (here, 15R probability change). It is possible. In this case, both the jackpot random number and the symbol random number (which may be the look-ahead information about the jackpot random number and the symbol random number) are determined, and when the condition is satisfied, the law breaking effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. It is possible.

Further, even in the above-mentioned second rush and the third rush, it is possible to execute a genuine look-ahead effect (here, a countdown notice) and a pseudo look-ahead notice effect. In the second rush, which is a latent state, the information on the jackpot random number and the symbol random number is referred to as in the first rush, and the control is performed so as to execute the first rush transition confirmation jackpot, and the third rush, which is a low probability confirmation. Then, unlike the first rush and the second rush, the execution is decided depending on which specific gaming state the player is in so that the execution can be decided as long as the information about the big hit random number is the information indicating the big hit. It may be controlled so that the mode and the degree of profit indicated by the effect are different. The reason why the conditions for determining the effect are different in this way is that the occurrence of the effect is determined under the same conditions as the first and second rushes, especially in the third rush because the jackpot probability itself is low. This is because, in the mode, the probability of occurrence of the effect is remarkably low, and the interest of the game may be lowered as compared with other game states.

In addition, when a pseudo look-ahead notice effect is executed in any of the game states of the first rush, the second rush, or the third rush, it is only notified that the jackpot has been won. It is also possible to produce a content such that it is not known at the end of the variable game at that time whether or not the player has won the big hit of the type.

Here, when the time is shortened (here, the third rush) performed under the normal probability, not only the occurrence of the big hit but also the player can recognize whether or not the type of the big hit is probable. It can be considered that doing so is not useful because it deprives the player of the opportunity to enjoy, such as whether or not the promotion to the probabilistic change is notified in the subsequent production (such as the production during the special game). For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of the subsequent promotion effect by not notifying the type of big hit during the time saving performed under the normal probability.

In addition, as a modification related to the implementation of the law breaking effect, the pseudo look-ahead notice is not implemented, and the start timing of the effect during the continuous advance notice based on the look-ahead is intentionally set depending on whether the law breaking effect is performed or not. It can also be implemented by making it different from. More specifically, in the case where the rule breaking effect is not performed (when the normal look-ahead effect is performed), as the number of fluctuations increases, the fluctuations in the trigger hold holding 3 are increased to "3", "2", and "1". However, when performing a law breaking effect, a variable effect that does not display the countdown (here, "3" is displayed and "2" is displayed) is performed twice, followed by a variable game (trigger). "3" is displayed in (variation in which the hold is 1).

At this point (the change at the time when the trigger hold exists in the hold 1), the player can be made to recognize that the countdown display following "3" will be displayed in the subsequent variable game, but the display of "3". In the next fluctuation of the fluctuation in which the above is performed, "2" is displayed and the jackpot symbol is stopped so that the jackpot effect is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a big hit effect without proceeding to the end of the countdown display, and it is possible to perform a rule breaking effect different from the above-mentioned one. Here, in the case of breaking the law based on the genuine look-ahead effect, the pseudo look-ahead notice of the jackpot fluctuation is completed with one fluctuation, whereas as described above, the mode in which the law is broken while the count progresses in multiple fluctuations is displayed. It is possible to make it.

Further, in this embodiment, a timer effect (variable timer effect) as illustrated below is executed. That is, the variable timer effect described here is executed in the gaming state (game mode) in which the ultra-short variation is performed, and in the present embodiment, the variable timer effect is performed during the first rush. There is.

Further, the fluctuation timer effect performed in association with this ultra-short fluctuation is an effect in which the count-up is started from the start of the first fluctuation in the first rush. Further, the count is stopped at the timing when the effect symbol 190 is a combination of big hits, and the count value at that time is stored in the sub-main board 301. Then, if you win the battle during the round production related to the 4th jackpot, in the 1st rush performed after the special game, the image related to the enemy character defeated in the previous 1st rush and the memorized count value Is converted into an icon image, and the icon images 183 and 184 are superimposed and displayed on the background during the first rush at that time (see FIG. 22 (a)).

Further, while the first rush and the fourth big hit continue, the icon images 183 and 184 showing the count value when the enemy character is defeated increase. Then, the player can confirm the time required to defeat the enemy character by visually recognizing the icon images 183 and 184. By performing such a variable timer effect, the player can get a feeling of how long it takes to defeat the enemy character and win the big hit during the first rush. Then, it is possible not only to experience the speed of obtaining a big hit due to a fluctuation in a very short time, but also to visually recognize it.

Regarding the variable timer effect, the game control is such that if the timer count stops when the effect symbols 190a to 190c are not aligned, the fourth big hit (battle bonus) is determined, or the effect is almost determined with high reliability. It is possible to adopt an aspect. In addition, a game in which the coloring or pattern of numbers or the like on the timer display is set to, for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color, or a predetermined pattern, and the degree of expectation of the fourth jackpot changes according to the difference in coloring or pattern. It is also possible to adopt a control mode. Even if the control to stop the variable timer is executed first, the internal counter that keeps time on the effect control board is updated to correct the time that was stopped after the symbol was stopped to the time that should be displayed. However, by displaying the accurate time until the big hit is acquired by displaying the icon later, it is possible to impress the player with an accurate feeling of the ball coming out per unit time. Further, although the variable timer effect is set as the effect in the first rush here, it may be executed for the second rush and the third rush. Further, the icon images 183 and 184 as described above can be continuously displayed even when the next different specific gaming state is entered.
<Outline of the production related to the 4th big hit>

Next, a special game when a fourth big hit (battle bonus) occurs during the first rush, and a production related to the special game will be described. Although the big hit according to the special figure 2 will be described here, the big hit according to the special figure 1 can be applied as long as it occurs in a specific situation such as during a short time.

First of all, if you hit a big hit (for example, a 4th big hit (battle bonus)) during a so-called high base (for example, 1st rush), which is a situation where the frequency of winning is increasing, such as during a short time or during electric support, a round effect is produced. In, your character and ally characters are now fighting against enemy characters (round battle production). Then, when the own character or the ally character wins the battle, the game mode shifts to either the first rush or the second rush. Also, if your character or ally character loses the battle, the game mode shifts to the third rush.

Furthermore, the round battle production in the 4th big hit (battle bonus) is settled up to 5R. This is because the player is made aware that the 5R was normal at the time of defeat.

In addition, the selection rate of the enemy character is different depending on the production symbol (big hit symbol) when it becomes a big hit. In other words, the winning percentage and reward (ball output) are set for each type of enemy character. For example, the ease of winning against a predetermined enemy character, the ball output (number of rounds) when winning, and the other predetermined enemy characters. The ease of winning and the number of balls (number of rounds) to be played when winning are different from each other.

More specifically, if you win the big hit of 15R and win the predetermined enemy character (here, enemy character A), the winning percentage will be relatively high, and the player will get a special game. The rewards received are also relatively high. However, if the player wins the 10R probability change or the 7R probability change and wins against another predetermined enemy character (here, the enemy character B), the winning percentage is high or medium, and the player gains. The rewards received will also be medium to low compared to the 15R jackpot.

Furthermore, if you win 10R normal or 7R normal, and if you win another predetermined enemy character (here, enemy character C), the winning percentage will be medium, and the reward that the player will get will be obtained. Is also moderate to low. In addition, if you win 5R normally and win another predetermined enemy character (here, enemy character D), the winning percentage will be relatively low, and the reward that the player will get will be 10R. It will be about low compared to the time of 7R.

In addition, when an ally character appears during the round battle production, the winning percentage and reward (here, the number of rounds) may be upgraded (promoted). In order to produce such an upgrade, if the type of jackpot symbol (big hit special symbol) is a predetermined one, the upgrade is performed on the side of the sub-main board 301 at the start of the special game or in the middle of the special game. (Changing the opponent from a strong enemy to a weak opponent) When the display lottery is executed and the upgrade display lottery is won, it is conceivable to select the enemy character from the ones with lower roles in advance.

Furthermore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the amount of upgrade (upgrade width) differs depending on the type of ally characters that join. In order to do so, for example, it is conceivable to provide a special ally character (the strongest ally character which is a premier character) having a winning percentage of 100% and a reward MAX (15R in this case). And if this strongest ally character joins your character, there is no possibility that it will be a 5R jackpot (always progress after 6R), and in terms of production, you will definitely win the battle with the enemy character, or draw. For example, it will be undecided (continuation of battle). In addition, when the strongest ally character appears, the relationship between the effect and the game content may be defined such that the game progresses to 15R with a relatively high probability (90%, etc.). Further, a plurality of types of strongest ally characters may be provided. Furthermore, the strongest ally character can also be referred to as a "super heat character".

Here, as the ally character, various characters other than the above-mentioned strongest ally character are provided, and various aspects can be considered for the characteristics such as the reward and the winning percentage of the ally character. For example, when a predetermined ally character appears, only the winning percentage increases, and even if the player wins, the reward is not upgraded. However, when various ally characters are provided in this way, there is an imbalance such as, for example, the ally characters appearing lose, even though the production is inspiring promotion (with a chance up). It is necessary to pay attention to the effect patterns that can be selected so that they do not appear.
<Outline of the production related to the second rush>

Next, the production related to the above-mentioned second rush will be described. First, in this embodiment, the frequency of the fluctuating game related to the second rush is set to the above-mentioned SA40 (= 40 rotations / minute), and as the fluctuating pattern table to be applied, the fluctuating pattern table related to the above-mentioned limited frequency pattern production (limited). Use a frequency table, a limited frequency pattern table, etc.). Further, in this embodiment, the production pattern of several seconds to several tens of seconds that reaches the reach may be selected while setting the SA40.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible not to adopt the SA40, but to perform the variable game at a lower frequency than the SA40 by using an extremely short-time fluctuation pattern or a production pattern of several seconds to several tens of seconds. Is.

Further, as the usage mode of the variation pattern table in this embodiment, the following can be exemplified. For example, as a fluctuation pattern table used during the second rush, a production (promotion fanning production) that arouses the player's expectation of being promoted to the first rush appears every 20 fluctuations. use. In other words, it is based on the use of fluctuation patterns related to extremely short time fluctuations (also called "ultra-short fluctuations" or "ultra-short fluctuations"), but every 20 fluctuation games (in 20-time increments), 1 The fluctuation of the times is controlled by using the fluctuation pattern of several seconds to several tens of seconds specified in the limited frequency pattern table. Then, by the limited frequency pattern production once every 20 times, a fanning production that can expect the player to develop the production is executed.

In addition, the fanning effect executed by the 20th variation has the relatively lowest degree of fanning among the subsequent fanning effects. In this sense, the 20th variation fanning effect may not be sensuously "fanned" in terms of the content of the effect.

The production including the fanning effect once in 20 times (also referred to as "mission block", "battle block", "effect block", or "variable block") is shown in FIG. 22 (b-1). ) Are shown in the variation pattern tables A to C (indicated as "table A" to "table C" in FIG. 22 (b-1)). Further, in the 100th and subsequent variable games, the variable pattern table D (shown as "table D" in FIG. 22 (b-1)) may be used depending on the game state.

Of these, the fluctuation pattern table A is composed of only fluctuation patterns of ultra-short fluctuations, and does not include promotion fanning effects. Then, in this embodiment, in the first rush described above, the same table as the table D (the time-saving and medium-time fluctuation pattern table usually used in the first rush), which is used as a basic table as in the case of an outlier, is used. in use. Further, as the "production that does not include the promotion fanning effect" here, a production that does not start a new mission or battle (also referred to as mission entry, battle entry, etc.) can be exemplified.

Here, as a modification of the table A, the fluctuation pattern tables used in the second rush and the first rush may not be shared, but different ultra-short fluctuation pattern tables may be provided. In addition, the number of fluctuation patterns and the number of production patterns associated with them are increased compared to the time-saving and medium-time fluctuation pattern table used as the basic in the first rush, and there are also those related to out-of-reach production and promotion production. It may be selectable.

Next, the variable pattern table B is for producing the player's expectation for a big hit (normal or probable change) (mission success / failure effect or promotion effect). Only one variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table B, or only one effect pattern may be associated with the variation pattern defined in the variation pattern table B.

In addition, the "directing to fuel expectations for big hits (normal or probable change) (mission success / failure promotion production or promotion fanning production)" here means a production showing how a predetermined mission or battle is started. There is. Further, the fluctuation pattern table B is associated with a fluctuation pattern related to the production (or the production of drawing, etc.) in which the mission fails or the battle is defeated.

FIG. 23A shows an example of a specific embodiment according to the variation pattern table B. The fluctuation pattern table B is independent (independent) of the number of reservations and the type of special symbol. In the example of FIG. 23A, in the case of the deviation shown on the left side in the figure, all the fluctuation pattern random numbers (here 0 to 49999) are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 15 seconds, and the fluctuation in the case of the deviation. As the variation pattern based on the pattern table B, only the one with 15 seconds is selected. Further, in the case of the hit shown on the right side in the figure, only the variation pattern of 25 seconds is selected as the variation pattern based on the variation pattern table B.

In the case of deviation, it is possible to provide not only a fluctuation of 15 seconds but also a fluctuation of, for example, 30 seconds (fluctuation pattern). In this case, it is conceivable that the number set is, for example, 45,000 to 49999. Then, as an effect based on this relatively long-term fluctuation pattern, for example, a button effect (such as repeated hits or one press) is executed after a mission failure (or after a battle is defeated), and then promoted again. It is possible to set a pattern (such as a resurrection promotion pattern).

Further, after the above-mentioned failure (or after defeat, etc.), a revival jackpot pattern that may be a jackpot may be provided via a button effect. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that "it may be hit if the button effect appears".

In addition, there is a possibility that the button effect is executed even when the game state in control has a low probability and the promotion effect cannot be executed. For this reason, it is conceivable that the button effect has a gap (sometimes it does not hit). Then, in the case of having a gap, an effect (such as displaying "chain") for encouraging the player to repeatedly hit is performed, and the displayed meter (continuous hit meter) indicates the level of repeated hits along with the repeated hits. It is possible to perform an effect such that the display does not reach the reference value (or the full value).

In addition, when performing an effect that can be developed by a single button operation instead of an effect related to repeated hits, the effect control such that promotion or hit is confirmed by the appearance of the button effect without having a gap. It is also possible to use the above-mentioned 30-second fluctuation pattern. In addition, as an effect related to this 30-second variation pattern, for example, even in the time saving final variation (100th variation), if a button effect appears after a mission failure or the like, promotion or hit is confirmed. It is also possible.

Subsequently, the variation pattern table C is a table for executing an effect of notifying the transition to the normal state after the time saving state ends when the previous big hit is a normal hit which is a non-probability variation hit. In this fluctuation pattern table C, after the mission fails, the effect of notifying the ball output obtained in a series of specific game periods (so-called consecutive villa period), and the effect of notifying that the game is a big hit by the revival effect after the mission fails. Fluctuation patterns related to the production are linked. Further, as for the fluctuation pattern table C, similarly to the fluctuation pattern table B, it is possible to have only one corresponding fluctuation pattern or effect pattern.

FIG. 23A shows an example of a specific embodiment related to the variation pattern table C. The fluctuation pattern table C is independent (independent) of the number of reservations and the type of special symbol. In the example of the fluctuation pattern table C in FIG. 23 (a), in the case of the deviation shown on the left side in the figure, all the fluctuation pattern random numbers (here 0 to 49999) are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 25 seconds. , As the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table B in the case of deviation, only the fluctuation pattern of 25 seconds is selected. Further, even in the case of the hit shown on the right side in the figure, only the variation pattern of 25 seconds is selected as the variation pattern based on the variation pattern table B.

Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table D is used in the first rush and is composed of only the fluctuation patterns of ultra-short fluctuations, and is the same as the fluctuation pattern table A described above. Then, the fluctuation pattern table A can be shared as the fluctuation pattern table D.

FIG. 23A shows an example of a specific embodiment related to the variation pattern table D. In the example of the fluctuation pattern table D in FIG. 23 (a), in the case of the deviation shown on the left side in the figure, 95% (0 to 47499) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers of 0 to 49999 is the fluctuation pattern of 0.6 seconds. 2% (47500 to 48499) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 1 second. Further, 1.5% (48500 to 49249) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 1.5 seconds, and 1% (49250 to 49749) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 2 seconds. There is. Further, 0.5% (49750-49999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds.

It is possible to use different variation pattern tables D depending on the number of reservations and the type of special symbol. Then, for example, when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 1, a fluctuation pattern table in which the number of positions for the fluctuation pattern of 3.0 seconds is 0 to 049999 is used, and the fluctuation pattern fixed at 3.0 seconds is used. It is possible to make it. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 to 4, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 can be set to a fluctuation pattern fixed at 10.0 seconds.

In the case of the hit shown on the right side of the figure, 10% (0 to 4999) of the fluctuation pattern random number is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 0.6 seconds, and 10% (5000 to 9999) of the fluctuation pattern random number is also assigned. ) Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 1 second. Further, 10% (1000 to 14999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 1.5 seconds, and 40% (15,000 to 34999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 2 seconds. Further, 30% (35,000 to 49999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds.

Subsequently, an example of an effect example using the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern tables A to D will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22 (b-2), the variation pattern table A is used in the variation game in which the number of fluctuations is the first to the 19th, and the variation pattern table B is used in the 20th time. Will be done. Further, the variation pattern table A is used at the 21st to 39th times, and the variation pattern table B is used at the 40th time. Further, similarly, the variation pattern table A is used at the 41st to 59th, 61st to 79th, and 81st to 99th times, and the variation pattern table B is used at the 60th and 80th times.

Further, at the 100th time, the fluctuation pattern table B (at the time of probability change) or the fluctuation pattern table C (at the time of non-probability change) is used. Then, after the 101st time, the fluctuation pattern table D is used if the probability change is in progress, and the fluctuation pattern table related to the normal mode is used if the probability change is not in progress.

Here, when the promotion effect to the probability change is performed at the 40th rotation, the 60th rotation, or the 80th rotation, for example, a limited frequency table (here, a variable pattern table) according to a jackpot symbol (here, a special symbol). Using C), it is also possible to refer to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D for ultra-short fluctuations from the 41st, 61st, or 81st fluctuations following them. In the case of a probability variation hit, it is a specification determined based on the jackpot symbol as shown in FIG. 22 (b-3) to determine from what variation the table D is referred to, but the symbol Factors other than, for example, the number of consecutive villas, the game state at the time of the previous big hit (whether you are staying in the first rush to the third rush, etc.) may be used, and the design and its modified examples are combined. There may be.

Further, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table A is not shared with the fluctuation pattern table for the first rush, and further, as the fluctuation pattern table A, the fluctuation pattern tables A, A'(A-dash), A''(A-too dash) , A ″ ″ (Acely dash), etc., and a plurality of types may be provided.

For example, FIG. 23 (b-1) shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table A which is not common to the fluctuation pattern table for the first rush as a modification. This fluctuation pattern table A can be used when the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 2 to 4. Further, in the example of FIG. 23 (b-1), in the case of the deviation shown on the left side in the figure, 60% (0 to 29999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers of 0 to 49999 becomes the fluctuation pattern of 1.0 second. It is assigned, and 24.5% (30000 to 42249) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 2.0 seconds. Here, when the number of holdings is one, for example, it is conceivable to use a fluctuation pattern fixed at 10 seconds as described above.

Further, 10.5% (42250 to 47499) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 3.0 seconds, and 4% (47500 to 49499) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 7.0 seconds. Has been done. Further, 1% (49500 to 49999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 15 seconds.

Regarding the variation pattern table A related to the deviation as shown in FIG. 23 (b-1), when the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1 to 4, the variation in the special figure 1 is 10. It is possible to use a fluctuation pattern table in which the number of digits for the fluctuation pattern of 0 seconds is 0 to 49999 so that the fluctuation pattern is fixed at 10.0 seconds.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned 15.0 second fluctuation pattern, if the gaming state is highly accurate (high probability state) when the command related to the fluctuation pattern is received on the sub side (sub-main board 301 side), It is possible to adopt a control mode such as drawing a lottery as to whether or not to execute a success effect (such as an effect of succeeding in a mission or winning a battle).

In the case of the hit shown on the right side of the figure, 0.5% (0 to 249) of the fluctuation pattern random number is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 3.0 seconds, and 19.5% (19.5%) of the fluctuation pattern random number ( 250-9999) is assigned to the 7.0 second variation pattern. Further, 80% (1000 to 49999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 25.0 seconds.

In addition, regarding the fluctuation pattern table A in the case of such a hit, in the reach production that becomes the reach, it is promoted due to the success of the mission, etc., and if the revival production as described above is performed, the big hit is confirmed. It is possible to perform production control. Then, in this case, if it is a normal reach, it is conceivable to perform the effect control in such a manner that there may be both a hit and a miss. Further, it is conceivable to perform the production of the development reach (for example, the one that recovers from the failure of the mission and develops into a big hit) with respect to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of 25.0 seconds.

Further, FIG. 23 (b-2) shows an example of the above-mentioned A'(A-dash). In the example of FIG. 23 (b-2), in the case of the deviation shown on the left side in the figure, 60% (0 to 29999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers of 0 to 49999 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 1.0 second. 24.5% (30000 to 42249) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 2.0 seconds. Further, 15.5% (42250 to 49999) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 3.0 seconds.

Regarding the variation pattern table A'related to the deviation as shown in FIG. 23 (b-2), when the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1 to 4, the variation in the special figure 1 is 10 It is possible to use a fluctuation pattern table in which the number of digits for the fluctuation pattern of 0.0 seconds is 0 to 49999 so that the fluctuation pattern is fixed at 10.0 seconds.

In the case of a hit shown on the right side of the figure, 20% (0 to 9999) of the fluctuation pattern random number is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 7.0 seconds, and 80% (1000 to 49999) of the fluctuation pattern random number. Is assigned to a variation pattern of 15.0 seconds.

It is possible to control the effect of the fluctuation pattern table A'in the case of such a hit, such that the big hit is confirmed when the reach is reached. Further, it is conceivable to perform an effect of development reach (for example, recovery from a mission failure or the like and developing into a big hit) with respect to the above-mentioned 15.0 second fluctuation pattern.

In such a case, for example, in order to raise expectations for probabilistic promotion in a short time, multiple types are provided according to the character type, mission content, battle content, etc., and each variation pattern table A1 to A3, etc. By assigning these effects to, it is possible to make the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to A3, etc., and the appearance frequency of characters, missions, battles, etc. assigned to the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to A3, etc. different. Become. Then, it is possible to provide a variety of productions, such as providing characters that are likely to produce effects that increase the expectation of probabilistic promotion, characters that are difficult to produce, and characters that are confirmed to win when reach is applied.

Further, in this embodiment, ultra-short fluctuations during the time reduction (for example, 0.6-second fluctuation or 1.0-second fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table A or D) are selected at a rate close to 100% (for example, 97% or more). Even if the fluctuation is a big hit, it takes about 0.6 to 3 seconds without producing a production that does not prolong the fluctuation time or producing a reach with the left and right production symbols (190a, 190c) aligned. It is also possible to provide a definite effect. In the mode shown in the modified example (for example, table A (modified example) in FIG. 23 (b-1)), it is possible to select a variation pattern from 0.6 seconds to about 1 minute or more. It is possible.

It is also possible to set the effect control related to the second rush as follows. For example, the symbol (special symbol) that generated the 4th jackpot (mission bonus) is the symbol corresponding to the 10R jackpot (10R probability variation symbol, 10R normal symbol), and the 10R probability variation symbols 1 to 4, It is assumed that five types of 10R normal symbols are provided as 10R normal symbols.

FIG. 22 (b-3) outlines the flow of the effect during the time reduction in the second rush when the 10R probability variation symbols 1 to 4 and the 10R normal symbols are hit during the specific game (first rush to third rush). Is shown. It should be noted that the case of winning during the specific game is a description assuming that the game based on the special figure 2 is performed during the specific game in the game machine of this embodiment, and is an unintended second in the normal state. Even if a player wins due to a change based on the ball entering the starting port, it is similarly controlled by the second rush.

First, as a common effect when the winning symbol is a 10R probability variation symbol 1 to 4, 10R normal symbol, a variation pattern table A in which a predetermined variation pattern is defined is used from the first variation to the 19th variation. Display suggesting the content of the effect to be executed for the first effect period of 21-40 fluctuation, the second effect period of 41-60 variation, the third effect period of 61-80 variation, and the fourth effect period of 81-100 variation. Perform the production. Specifically, an effect in which one (singular or plural) of a plurality of characters who are allies of the main character randomly join is displayed. Further, as a modification, when the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern tables A and D are not common, an effect of merging according to the subsequent selection mode of the fluctuation pattern table (in what order A, A', etc. are referred to) is displayed. It may be something to do. Similar to the above-mentioned variation pattern table A, the variation pattern table A is an ultra-short variation in which an effect pattern that does not include the promotion fanning effect is associated.

Further, at the time of the 20th variable game, the variable pattern table B for the promotion fanning effect is used. As described above, the fluctuation pattern table B is associated with an effect pattern including an effect (mission success / failure effect or promotion incitement effect) for inspiring expectations for a big hit (normal or probable change). In this embodiment, even the 10R probability variation symbol 1, which is an example of shifting to the selection state of the variation pattern table D at the fastest speed, is changed after 41 variation. This is because, as described above, the 20 fluctuations after the start of the second rush are set in the subsequent effect suggestion period (the period suggesting which character's mission effect is to be output), and in the 20th variation. , Although the variation for executing promotion fanning is selected using the variation pattern table B, in the 20th variation, the ally characters who joined will produce the effect in the 1st to 4th effect period. It is a variation that notifies the player of a display such as whether to execute.

Further, in the 21st to 39th fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern table A'in which a predetermined fluctuation pattern is defined is used. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A'is the same as that of the fluctuation pattern table A described above. Then, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A'is for executing an effect pattern showing the execution process of the mission and the state of the fight.

Further, at the time of the 40th fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table B is used, and the promotion effect of succeeding in the mission or winning the battle is executed. Further, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D is used at the time of the 41st and subsequent fluctuations.

Subsequently, when the winning symbol is the 10R probability variation symbol 2, the same effect as in the case of the 10R probability variation symbol 1 is executed from the first variation to the 19th variation. Further, in the 20th variable game, as in the case of the 10R probability variation symbol 1, the variation pattern table B for the promotion fanning effect is used, and from the 21st variation to the 39th variation are described above. The variation pattern A'is used. In addition, at the time of the 40th fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern table associated with an effect pattern of contents that fail in a mission or battle is used. In this embodiment, the variation pattern table selected at the 40th variation is the variation pattern table B, the unsuccessful variation pattern is common to the successful variation pattern table (same 1 variation), and the sub-main CPU When making a production decision, it is controlled so as to make a failure according to the symbol of the previous big hit. If you want to make the production time different between success and failure (for example, after success, when performing the movement of a movable character or the deciding dialogue image production of the main character or ally character), the variation pattern table B on the main board side Can also be executed by providing a success pattern B'and a failure pattern B''.

Further, at the time of the 41st variation to the 59th variation, the variation pattern table A ″ that defines a predetermined variation pattern is used. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ″ is the same as that of the fluctuation pattern tables A and A ′ described above in terms of fluctuation time. Then, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ″ is different from the fluctuation pattern tables A and A ′ described above, and an effect pattern showing the execution process of the mission and the state of the fight is executed. There is.

Further, at the time of the 60th fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table B is used, and the promotion effect of succeeding in the mission or winning the battle is executed. Further, at the time of the 61st fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D is used.

Subsequently, when the winning symbol is the 10R probability variation symbol 3, it is the same as the case of the 10R probability variation symbol 2 from the first time to the 59th change. Then, at the time of the 60th fluctuation, the same fluctuation pattern table E as the 40th fluctuation is used, and the production of the content that fails the mission or the battle is executed.

Further, at the time of the change from the 61st time to the 79th time, the fluctuation pattern table A ″ ″ that defines a predetermined fluctuation pattern is used. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ″ is the same as that of the fluctuation pattern tables A, A ″, and A ″ described above with respect to the fluctuation time. Then, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ″ is executed in a mode different from that of the fluctuation pattern tables A, A ′, A ″ described above, and an effect pattern showing the execution process of the mission and the state of the fight is executed. It has become a thing.

Further, at the time of the 80th fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table B is used, and the promotion effect of succeeding in the mission or winning the battle is executed. Further, at the time of the 81st fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D is used.

Subsequently, when the winning symbol is the 10R probability variation symbol 4, it is the same as the case of the 10R probability variation symbol 3 from the first time to the 79th change. Then, at the time of the 80th change, the same change pattern table B as the 40th and 60th times is used, and the production of the content that the mission or the battle fails is executed.

Further, at the time of the change from the 81st time to the 99th time, the fluctuation pattern table A ″ ″ (A for dash) in which a predetermined fluctuation pattern is defined is used. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ″ ″ is the same as that of the fluctuation pattern tables A, A ″, A ″, and A ″ ″ described above with respect to the fluctuation time. Then, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ″ ″ represents the execution process of the mission and the state of the fight in a mode different from the fluctuation pattern tables A, A ″, A ″, A ″ ″ described above. The effect pattern is executed.

Further, at the time of the 100th fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table B is used, and the promotion effect of succeeding in the mission or winning the battle is executed. Further, at the 101st variation, the variation pattern table D described above is used.

Subsequently, when the winning symbol is a 10R normal symbol, it is the same as in the case of the 10R probability variation symbol 4 from the first to the 99th fluctuation. Then, at the time of the 100th fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern table C is used, and the production of the content that fails the mission or the battle is executed. At this time, since the specific game state ends and the so-called consecutive villa state ends, how many balls can be obtained during the advantageous period is a failure effect (effect such as mission failure or battle defeat). Output after completion. Then, the game mode falls from the time saving mode and shifts to the normal mode, and from the 101st time, the fluctuation pattern table for the normal probability variation mode is used.

Here, the effect control during the time reduction when the 10R probability variation and the 10R normal occur has been described, but the same applies to the effect control during the time reduction when, for example, a 7R jackpot and a 5R jackpot (Special Figure 1) occur. It is possible to adopt the control mode of.

Further, in the second rush, as described above, it is possible to perform an effect (merging effect) in which ally characters join. For example, the variable game every 20 times is set as one block, and in the first to 20th blocks (first variable block), an effect showing how a ally character joins the own character is executed. Furthermore, the 21st to 40th blocks (2nd variable block), the 41st to 60th blocks (3rd variable block), the 61st to 80th blocks (4th variable block), and the 81st to 100th blocks. In the block (fifth variable block), productions such as missions and battles are executed according to the joined ally characters.

Here, in the production pattern according to the fluctuation pattern of the ultra-short fluctuation, it may be difficult to express the state of merging of the ally characters with one fluctuation. In such a case, it is possible to express the state of merging across multiple ultra-short fluctuations (for example, fluctuations for 5 times), or for example, fluctuations in the middle such as the 15th, 35th, and 50th times, and fluctuations of about several seconds. It is conceivable to apply a limited frequency pattern with time. Furthermore, it is also conceivable that the characters to be merged are made to appear from the fluctuation before the fluctuation (the fluctuation in front of the fluctuation) in which the state of merging is shown.

It is also possible to provide multiple types of ally characters to join. Then, for example, it is possible to provide a variable pattern table as different ones such as the above-mentioned variable pattern tables A, A'to A'", etc., and assign different ally characters to each variable pattern table. It can be said that the ally character in this case is matched to the fluctuation pattern table. In the above example, the fluctuation pattern tables A to A "" are output in order, but the reference order may be changed depending on the conditions such as the jackpot symbol, or the same fluctuation pattern table may be referred to multiple times. You may.

Further, it is possible to set different ally characters as, for example, six types of ally characters A to F, and to have different expectations for time saving continuation, production development, jackpot, etc. related to these ally characters A to F. Then, these ally characters A to F will always be a big hit if they develop into a reach situation (characters that appear at the time of the fluctuation pattern table A'in FIG. 23 (b-1)), and a predetermined fluctuation pattern table ( It is possible to set up ally characters that appear only when directing with a limited frequency table, etc.).

In addition, when the fanning effect is performed based on the fluctuation selected at a timing other than the fluctuation (variation based on the fluctuation pattern table B) that occurs at the timing of every 20 missions, battles, etc. (FIG. 23 (b-3)). It is also possible to provide a ally character that always succeeds in the fluctuation pattern table A to A ″ ″ for 15.0 seconds, etc.). For example, instead of the fluctuation of the break every 20 times, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern that can perform the promotion fanning effect even if the fluctuation is in the middle of the break, and it is executed for the look-ahead effect or the change during execution. When a predetermined character (such as the above-mentioned strongest ally character) appears in the advance notice production, for example, it is possible to shift to the promotion fanning production. By doing so, it is possible to effectively perform the fanning effect without making the appearance interval of the fanning effect monotonous.

In addition, as another modification, when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation block, an effect of whether or not to perform various promotion effects (may be called a branch effect) is executed. Can be exemplified. Then, in this branching effect, after a failure or defeat, a new ally character appears, and when all the ally characters of a predetermined number (for example, 5 which is the same as the number of variable blocks) fail or are defeated, the own character missions. And battles can be illustrated.

Further, when the promotion effect is output before the main control means shifts to the selection state of the fluctuation pattern table D and the fluctuation pattern is originally selected according to the second rush, the command related to the fluctuation pattern table B described above is used. Can be exemplified by performing different effects based on the difference in whether the game mode is the first rush or the second rush when the sub-main board 301 is received. For example, in the first rush, instead of the promotion fanning effect in the second rush, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold existing at the time of receiving the command related to the fluctuation pattern table B, and a specific notice is generated. It is possible to display whether or not (the strongest ally character approaches and stays on the screen to perform an effect suggesting that there is a big hit in the hold).

Also, at the time of the second rush hour, if the previous jackpot was a probabilistic jackpot, the last character to appear always succeeded in the mission or battle, and if it was a normal jackpot, all the characters that appeared You can exemplify things like failing missions and battles. Further, such an effect can be performed in a battle effect during a special game.

Furthermore, in the fanning fluctuation (20th fluctuation in each fluctuation block, fluctuation in the middle, etc.), if the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation that becomes a big hit, the display mode of the success of the mission or battle is promoted to the normal first rush. It is possible to make it different from the time. For example, a mode that succeeds without failing in the middle (normal success) and a mode that recovers after failing once (recovery success) are provided, and in the case of normal success, it is suggested that it will be a big hit to shift to the first rush. In the case of a successful revival, it simply suggests that it will be one of the big hits.

In addition, as another production mode, it is suggested that if the merged character succeeds in a mission or battle, it will move to the first rush or it will be a big hit, and the hero will appear from the middle in the situation where the hero has not appeared. However, if the mission or battle is successful, it can be exemplified that it simply suggests that it will be one of the big hits, or that it will be a 15R probability variation big hit. Furthermore, even if the main character appears, the mission or battle fails, and the player cannot receive relative benefits.

It is also possible to make the strongest ally character as described above appear in the look-ahead effect during the variable game. In this case, for example, it is possible to exemplify the effect control in such a manner that when the strongest ally character appears, the probability variation jackpot is obtained at a rate of 90% or more.

Furthermore, it is determined whether there is a big hit hold (big hit hold) in the hold only in a predetermined case, and the big hit information is stored, and a production other than the intense heat character (strongest ally character) is planned. In this situation, it is conceivable to perform a production (alternative production) that interrupts a fiery character as a predetermined look-ahead effect that suggests a big hit at a high rate. Then, in this case, it is conceivable to make a big hit at a rate of 100% (so-called big hit notification without a gap).

Further, as a "predetermined case" in which the above-mentioned effect is performed, for example, a look-ahead effect is executed over a period in which the fluctuation based on the current hold straddles the above-mentioned fluctuation block, that is, a period in which the end of the fluctuation block is reached (for example). The 17th to 20th fluctuations of the fluctuation block), or the final fluctuation game of the fluctuation block (for example, the 20th fluctuation of the fluctuation block) can be exemplified. It can be said that such a look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that is drawn only for a limited period in the vicinity of the timing of switching to the effect based on the limited frequency pattern (final variation of the variable block, etc.). It is also possible to prevent such an effect from being performed on the final fluctuation in the first fluctuation block (for example, the 20th out of 100 times) or the last block (100th out of 100 times). Is. In addition, when the above-mentioned alternative effect is performed in the first rush, it cannot be confirmed that there is a hit hold, so that it is not a 100% big hit notification.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned A'' (A-too dash) to A "" "(A-for-dash), etc., an effect is executed according to the characteristics of the characters appearing in the first rush like A'(A-dash). It is possible to do. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the selection rate of 15.0 seconds (promotion fanning fluctuation that produces promotion fanning effect) is higher than A. In this case, it becomes easier to select the failure effect (effect such as mission failure or battle defeat) on the side of the sub-main board 301. On the contrary, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the selectivity of 15.0 seconds is lower than that of A. In this case, it becomes easier to select a success effect. Further, in the case of reach, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern of about 1 minute or more as described above.

<Outline of the production related to the 3rd rush>
Next, the production related to the above-mentioned third rush will be described. First, in this embodiment, the third rush is a mode (sub-mode) in which the battle is defeated in the round production at the time of the big hit according to the special figure 2 and the game shifts after the special game per 5R normal game. The third rush is a mode for deterministically notifying that 100 fluctuations are performed in a high base state (low probability high base) with a low probability. In addition, when the time reduction is added to the normal hit of the special figure 1 as in this embodiment, the mode during the time reduction can be set to the third rush.

Regarding the production pattern, in this embodiment, the content can give the player the impression that it is almost the same as the first rush. More specifically, it is possible to make the background images different to the extent that the characters and the game frequency are the same as those in the first rush. Further, it is possible to select only the final variation (100th time) as the limited frequency pattern in which the variation time is relatively longer than the variation pattern of the ultra-short variation of about 0.6 seconds. For example, it is conceivable that the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table C is used for the 100th time, and the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D (or fluctuation pattern table A) is used for other fluctuations.
<Special Figure 1 Measures against special jackpots>

In the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, one of the basic game flows is that a big hit according to the special figure 2 occurs in the first rush, which is a specific game state, after the first hit described above. However, it is conceivable that the game progresses outside the game progress according to such basic game development. For example, in a situation where a special game related to the first hit is followed by a specific game state, there is a start prize related to the special figure 1, and a variable effect or a production during the special game is performed during the special game. Round production) may be performed. In addition, when the above-mentioned first hit according to the special figure 1 already includes the information that becomes the big hit according to the special figure 1 in the reserved storage information, the big hit according to the special figure 1 is performed during the first rush. It will occur.

Such a situation can be considered as a special situation, and the jackpot according to the special figure 1 in the special situation can be referred to as "special figure 1 special jackpot" or "accident hit". And, regarding the big hits related to Special Figure 1, if there are differences such as the presence or absence of time reduction and the number of times, the presence or absence of electric chew support (electric support) and the number of times, etc., if no measures are taken, the situation It is conceivable that a production that is not suitable for the hobby will be performed and spoil the interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, measures are taken for the case where such a special figure 1 special jackpot occurs, and these measures will be described below with examples.

First, in this embodiment, as the jackpot of the special figure 1, the first jackpot (mission bonus), the second jackpot (hyper bonus), and the third jackpot (probability) are provided. Then, when these big hits occur as special figure 1 special big hits, predetermined control is performed according to the type of the generated big hits as follows. In the following, the case where the second big hit (hyper bonus) occurs as the special figure 1 special big hit, the third big hit (probability) occurs, and the first big hit (mission bonus) will be described in this order. ..

For example, when the special figure 1 special jackpot is the above-mentioned second jackpot (hyper bonus), the same effect as when the jackpot in the special figure 2 occurs is selected and executed. .. More specifically, when the second big hit (hyper bonus) occurs as the special figure 1 special big hit, the production during the special game (round production) is different from the above-mentioned round production at the time of the fourth big hit. The same effect as the round effect at the time of the second big hit (hyper bonus) is executed. However, at the time of the game after the special game is completed, the same effect as that of the first rush is executed. In other words, since the second jackpot (hyper bonus) is a 15R probability variation, by performing such effect control, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the effect related to the special figure 1 special jackpot. There is.

Here, as the production of the "similar production", an exact same production, a production produced to give the player the same impression and atmosphere, and the like can be exemplified. Further, in the production, it is conceivable to share the effect pattern with the special figure 2 or to separately provide the same effect pattern as the special figure 2 for the special figure 1. In order to prevent the above-mentioned "special figure 1 special jackpot", it is preferable to set the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 to a long time. In addition, most of the production during the first rush is performed based on the fluctuation pattern of the extremely short fluctuation time as described above, but as the production after the special game accompanying the special big hit in Special Figure 1, the number of fluctuations (number of games) It is conceivable to perform the same production as the first rush. Further, in the game flow shown in FIG. 19, when the 5R normal jackpot was obtained by the jackpot of special figure 1, the number of time-saving games was set to 0, but in the specific game, the special jackpot of special figure 1 was subtracted, and the player If the time-saving game is not given to the player, the degree of disadvantage will increase too much. In order to prevent such a situation, when the special jackpot in FIG. 1 is a normal jackpot, for example, a specific game having a time saving of 100 times is given. The number of time reductions (here, 100 times) was set to be about the same as that of Special Figure 2, but it is conceivable that the number of times is less than that. Further, the number of fluctuations in which the same effect as that of the third rush is performed may be set according to the number of time reductions (100 times, less than 100 times, etc.) given for the special figure 1.

Subsequently, when the special figure 1 special jackpot is the above-mentioned third jackpot (probability), it is conceivable to shorten the time of the jackpot start demo and the jackpot demo as much as possible based on the specific game state. As the time of the big hit start demo and the end demo at this time, for example, it can be exemplified that the time is as close to 0 as possible (about 0.1 to 1 second, etc.).

Then, when the third big hit (probability) occurs in this way, the player cannot expect the benefit of the special game, so it is conceivable to start and end the special game inconspicuously. Then, as an effect in this situation, for example, during a special game, the effect symbol 190 at the time of fixed stop is continuously displayed (fixed display) while being stopped, and further, on the screen of the effect display device 60, "return" is performed. It is conceivable to display "Medium" or "Please wait for a while" (band display, etc.) at the same time.

Further, when the effect symbol 190 is fixedly displayed, it is conceivable that the effect symbol 190 is colored, for example, gray, which is not normally used, to indicate that it is a rare special situation. By doing so, it is possible to give the player the impression that it is a kind of freeze effect. Then, it is possible to have the player wait for the transition to the first rush without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Subsequently, when the special figure 1 special jackpot is the above-mentioned first jackpot (mission bonus), instead of the above-mentioned production indicating whether or not the mission is successful, the above-mentioned fourth jackpot (mission bonus) The same round effect as when the battle bonus) occurs is executed. Here, in the production, the round production of the 4th jackpot (battle bonus) and the production pattern are shared, and the production pattern for the same production as the 4th jackpot (battle bonus) is separately provided for the 1st jackpot. And so on.

Furthermore, at the end demonstration related to the special game in this case, if the first big hit (mission bonus) is a probability change hit, a victory effect indicating the victory related to the battle is executed, and further, the process shifts to the above-mentioned first rush. The first rush rush effect indicating that is executed. On the other hand, if the first big hit (mission bonus) is a normal hit, the defeat effect indicating the defeat related to the battle is executed at the end demonstration, and the third rush rush effect is executed.

As described above, the jackpot according to the special figure 1 (not limited to the third jackpot (probability)) may be different from the jackpot of the special figure 2 in terms of the presence or absence of the number of time reductions and the mode and matters of the time reduction. However, with respect to the special figure 1 special jackpot during the specific game, by taking the above-mentioned measures against these differences, it becomes possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 special is based on the fact that the big hit related to the special figure 1 may be different from the big hit related to the special figure 2, such as falling to the normal state and the number of time reductions is small. It is conceivable to perform the round production at the time of a big hit as follows. For example, as a round effect when the first jackpot (mission bonus) occurs as a special figure 1 special jackpot, the same effect as the round effect at the time of the fourth jackpot (battle bonus) is performed as in the jackpot related to the special figure 2. Run. In this case, the first jackpot can be referred to as a battle bonus different from the fourth jackpot.

Then, for example, the main character executes an effect of fighting a predetermined character that is not selected at the time of the big hit according to the special figure 2 or an effect of fighting only the strongest or strongest class of enemies that can be selected at the time of the big hit according to the special figure 2. .. Furthermore, among these, in the production of fighting the strongest or strongest class enemies, for example, it is possible to add a band display such as "DANGER" or "DEAD or ALIVE", or to display a probability that will be a probability change in the start demo. Conceivable. In this embodiment, the probability that the first jackpot will change (probability of the first jackpot) is the same as the probability that the first jackpot will not change (35%), so that the probability of probability change is 50%. In order to represent it, for example, it is conceivable to display "50:50 BATTLE" or the like. In addition, the winning percentage in the battle bonus in Special Figure 2 is 75% because it is the case of subtracting the big hit that shifts to the first rush and the second rush, and it is better to win the big hit in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. It is easy to get into a situation where you can perform a winning effect.

As a modified example, a variable effect that becomes a big hit is executed depending on whether or not there is an electric chew support (electric support) after the special game by the normal hit (here, 5R normal in the first big hit) according to the special figure 1. It may be divided according to the game state at the time. For example, if a big hit occurs during normal times without electric support, the electric support is not added after the special game, and if a big hit occurs during electric support with electric support, 100 after the special game. It is possible to adopt a control mode such as adding electric support over the fluctuation of times. Further, in this case, the symbol distribution (the distribution of the winning ratio between the symbol that is probable and the symbol that is normally hit) is 50:50 as described above, so that the above-mentioned "DANGER", "DEAD or ALIVE", etc. It is conceivable to display "50:50 BATTLE", which is the display of the probability of change in the start demo.

Further, regarding the 5R round production, as the 5R production which is the final round, it is conceivable to execute a production indicating success or failure which is the result of the mission and the victory or defeat which is the result of the battle, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , It is conceivable to perform a production (result production) showing the result of a mission or battle on the 4th round before the final round. Then, in this case, after the result production, the period including the 5th round can be used to secure a period for performing the effect after the result is obtained.

Further, as a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an effective production cannot be performed due to an excessively short period after the result is obtained. Further, even if the 5th round is completed in a relatively short time, it is possible to perform the effect after the result is obtained for a sufficient time as compared with the case where the result is produced on the 5th round. Also, for example, the result that appears in the 4th R production is positive content such as success or victory, and if the appearance timing of the production (result production) that represents the result is carried over to the 5th R, be sure to It is also possible to adopt a control mode in which a negative content such as failure or defeat is performed (or at a high rate close to 100%). In order to avoid the carry-over of victory or defeat against the 5th R from being confirmed as a defeat in this way, a big hit end demo based on the game state (when it is a specific game state) when the 5R normal (first big hit) of Special Figure 1 is acquired. You may control to increase the time of.

Further, as a situation where such a special jackpot occurs, the above-mentioned second rush hour, third rush hour, and the like can be mentioned. When the first big hit and the second big hit are won in the second rush and the third rush, the same control as in the first rush is performed. On the other hand, when the third big hit (probability) occurs among the special big hits, the fluctuation pattern tables B and C are not referred to thereafter, which may cause inconvenience. Therefore, for example, during a special game As a production, it is conceivable that a character such as the main character will appear and perform a probabilistic promotion production.
<Production mode related to the 4th jackpot using list production>
<< Outline of list production >>

Next, another embodiment of the above-mentioned effect related to the fourth big hit will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 24 shows the flow of the gaming state including the fourth big hit according to the present embodiment, and the same description is made in the same portion as the flow of the gaming state according to the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 19). ing. In addition, here, the part different from the above-described embodiment is mainly described, and the description of the same part will be omitted.

In the present embodiment shown in FIG. 24, a battle effect (round battle effect) is executed as an effect during the fourth big hit as in the above-described embodiment (FIG. 19), and a battle effect is executed in addition to this. It may not be done. In FIG. 24, the illustration of the fourth big hit when the battle effect is not executed is omitted. Further, in FIG. 24, the fourth big hit when the battle effect is executed is shown as a “battle bonus”.

In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the battle effect (round battle effect) related to the fourth big hit is executed, the battle effect is a normal hit that does not become a probable change, whether the generated fourth big hit is a probable change hit. It is possible to show the distinction between (here, "hit a defeat"). Here, the probabilistic hits that are probable changes are classified into "hits 1" or "hits 2" according to the type, and the normal hits that are not probable changes are referred to as "defeat hits".

Further, the battle effect of the present embodiment can be performed not only as a round effect but also at a variable effect stage (reach stage, etc.) before the round effect is performed. For example, when a battle effect is executed as a round effect, the player can determine that a big hit has occurred due to the start of the battle, and depending on the result of the subsequent battle, the type of big hit (probability change or normal, etc.) ) Can be discriminated.

On the other hand, when the battle effect is executed before the round effect (during the variable effect), the battle effect is executed, for example, during the reach. Then, depending on the result of the battle, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not he has won the big hit. Also, for example, if the main character wins the battle, it is a big hit of a type that is relatively profitable for the player, and if the main character loses the battle, or the victory of the main character is not confirmed. If the situation continues, it is also possible to adopt a production control mode such as winning a type of jackpot that has a relatively small profit for the player.

Of the 4th jackpots in the present embodiment, the 4th jackpot (battle bonus) in which the battle production (round battle production) is performed as the round production is 15R probability variation, 10R probability variation, 7R probability variation, 5R probability variation, as shown in FIG. It is either 5R normal. Of these, the 15R probability variation corresponds to the above-mentioned "hit 1". In the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation is a big hit of a type in which the player can obtain the maximum number of prize balls (maximum amount of balls to be ejected).

Further, the other probability variation hits, 10R probability variation, 7R probability variation, and 5R probability variation, correspond to the above-mentioned "hit 2". Furthermore, 5R usually corresponds to the above-mentioned "defeat hit", and when this "defeat hit" is hit, for example, the main character or ally character loses the battle. .. Then, in the present embodiment, when the fourth big hit becomes "hit 1", the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the above-mentioned first rush as shown in FIG. 24. In addition, when the fourth big hit becomes "hit 2", the game state after the end of the special game becomes a probability change and a time reduction. Further, when the fourth big hit becomes a "defeat hit", the game state after the special game ends is shortened.

The ratios of "hit 1", "hit 2", and "defeat jackpot" are 50% for "hit 1", 15% for "hit 2", and 35% for "defeat jackpot". There is. Then, these ratios are determined by the ratio of jackpot symbols (symbol ratio) as described above, and the distribution of rounds at the time of jackpot (round distribution) is also determined by the ratio of jackpot symbols (symbol ratio).

In the 4th jackpot battle production (round battle production), your character and ally characters fight against enemy characters, but as part of various battle productions, for example, your character, ally character, etc. In addition, it is possible to adopt a character that develops as if a large number of characters including enemy characters are fighting in a battle royal (or battle royale) style.

Further, in this kind of battle production, it is possible to make any character appear as a person who can survive until the end (here, referred to as "final winner candidate") in the production. However, with the development of the battle, the defeated person (referred to here as the "loser") is sequentially excluded from the final winner candidates, and the type corresponding to the last surviving person (here referred to as the "final winner"). It is possible to generate a probabilistic jackpot.

Further, during the battle effect of the present embodiment, a character list effect (hereinafter referred to as "list effect") for displaying a list of characters may be executed. In this list effect, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the list display area 201 is superimposed and displayed on a predetermined portion (lower center, etc.) on the screen of the effect display device 60. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 25A, the effect state display area 206, the jackpot game state display area 207, the message display area 208, and the right-handed display area 209 are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the list display area 201 of each display area shown in FIG. 25 (a), four first index display units 202a to 202d and eight character displays are displayed from top to bottom. Units 203a to 203h and eight second index display units 204a to 204h are also provided. Although details of these will be described later, the first index display units 202a to 202d at the uppermost stage group the characters based on a predetermined first index (here, the probability variation expectation).

Further, the character display units 203a to 203h are areas for displaying the eight characters A to H individually. Further, the second index display units 204a to 204h indicate a predetermined second index (here, the amount of balls to be ejected) for each character A to H (see FIG. 25B).

Here, in FIGS. 25A and 25B, the letters A to H are shown together with the characters in the character display units 203a to 203h so that the characters A to H can be easily distinguished in the figure. Further, in FIG. 25B, the alphabets A to H in the character display units 203a to 203h are moved to the right side in the character display units 203a to 203h so as to avoid other symbols and leader lines.

Subsequently, the details of the first index display units 202a to 202d, the character display units 203a to 203h, and the second index display units 204a to 204h will be described. Here, the character display units 203a to 203h will be described first.

Characters of different types (8 types) are displayed on the character display units 203a to 203h. In the present embodiment, the characters displayed on the character display units 203a to 203h are all enemy characters that play against the main character and the ally character, but in the following description relating to the list production, simply "characters" May be called. As a part of the characters displayed on the character display units 203a to 203h, the same type of characters as the enemy characters A to F in the above-described embodiment may be used.

As shown in FIG. 25B, a character with a round face and an angry expression (hereinafter referred to as "character A" or "character A") is displayed in the character display unit 203a located at the left end of the list display area 201. A male character (hereinafter referred to as "character B" or "character B") who does not wear glasses is displayed on the character display unit 203b on the right side of the display.

Further, a female character without glasses (hereinafter referred to as "character C" or "character C") is displayed on the character display unit 203c on the right side thereof, and the character display unit 203d on the right side thereof is displayed. , A character with a long face and an angry expression (hereinafter referred to as "character D" or "character D") is displayed. Further, a character with a long face and a smile (hereinafter referred to as "character E" or "character E") is displayed on the character display unit 203e on the right side thereof, and glasses are displayed on the character display unit 203f on the right side thereof. A female character (hereinafter referred to as "character F" or "character F") multiplied by is displayed.

A character with a round face and a smile (hereinafter referred to as "character G" or "character G") is displayed on the character display unit 203g on the right side thereof, and glasses are displayed on the character display unit 203h on the right side thereof. A male character multiplied by (hereinafter referred to as "character H" or "character H") is displayed.

Here, regarding the characters A to H of the present embodiment, the positional relationship between the character display units 203a to 203h and the characters A to H is not constant, and the character display units 203a to 203h arranged in order from the left end to the right end in the figure. On the other hand, different characters A to H can be arranged each time according to predetermined rules (here, the first rule and the second rule). For example, as a result of an operation based on a predetermined rule (described later), the character C may be displayed on the character display unit 203a, or the character B may be displayed on the character display unit 203g.

In addition to the characters A to H, for example, characters I to K are provided, and eight characters from more than eight characters A to K are displayed after undergoing a predetermined selection process. May be good. Further, the number of character display units may be less than 8 or 9 or more.

Subsequently, the above-mentioned first index display units 202a to 202d will be described. The first index display units 202a to 202d classify the characters A to H as described above based on a predetermined first index (here, the probability change expectation degree), and group them to show them. That is, the characters A to H are associated with the probability variation expectation (first index), and the probability variation expectation is determined according to the types of the characters A to H.

The details of the probability variation expectation of the characters A to H will be described later, but each character A to H is grouped according to the associated probability variation expectation, and examples of FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b). Then, the characters A and B are assigned to the leftmost group 1 in the figure. Further, the characters C to E are assigned to the group 2 shown on the right side of the group 1, and the characters F and G are assigned to the group 3 shown on the right side of the group 2. Then, the character H is assigned to the group 4 shown at the right end in the figure.

Here, the "probability change expectation degree" corresponds to the ratio of the type of jackpot that is won to be the probability change jackpot. The "probability variation expectation" is determined according to the type of jackpot, and as described above, the type of jackpot is determined by the type of special symbol related to the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the probability change expectation is higher in the order of group 1, group 2, group 3, and group 4. Then, the degree of probability variation expectation (roughly probability variation expectation) is represented by the number of star marks in the first index display units 202a to 202d in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b). There is.

Group 1, which has the lowest probability of change, is comprehensively indicated by one star mark, and Group 2, which has the next lowest probability of change, is also comprehensively indicated by two star marks. Furthermore, Group 3 is comprehensively indicated by three star marks, and Group 4, which has the highest probability of change, is indicated by four star marks. The value and calculation method of the probability variation expectation of each character will be described later.

Subsequently, the above-mentioned second index display units 204a to 204h will be described. The second index display units 204a to 204h represent a predetermined second index (here, the amount of balls to be ejected) associated with each character A to H. The amount of balls to be paid out here indicates an estimate of the number of prize balls that a player can obtain according to the type of big hit. Further, in this list production, the amount of balls to be paid out may be referred to as "reward".

The amount of balls (reward) can be theoretically obtained by multiplying the number of prize balls per prize, the number of balls entered in one round (count number), and the number of rounds determined according to the type of big hit. If the number of prize balls per winning is 15 balls, the number of winning balls in one round is 10 counts, and the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot, the number of balls to be ejected is 2250. Further, when the type of jackpot is 7R jackpot, the amount of balls ejected is 1050, and when the type of jackpot is 5R jackpot, the amount of balls ejected is 750.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the amount of balls to be ejected associated with the characters A and B is 2250 and 1050, respectively, and the second ball corresponding to the characters A and B is used. Numerical values of "2250" and "1050" are displayed on the index display units 204a and 204b. Further, the ball ejection amounts associated with the characters C to E are 2250, 1050, and 750, respectively, and the corresponding second index display units 204c to 204e have "2250" and "1050", respectively. , The numerical value of "750" is displayed.

Similarly, the amount of balls to be ejected associated with the characters F and G is 2250 and 1050, respectively, and the corresponding second index display units 204f and 204g have "2250" and "1050", respectively. The numerical value of is displayed. The number of balls ejected associated with the character H is 2250, and the corresponding numerical value of "2250" is displayed on the second index display unit 204h.

As a type of big hit, for example, even if it is a 15R big hit, the opening period of the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) in some rounds is as short as about 0.5 to 1 second, for example. , It is possible to provide a thing (15R probability variation (actual 7R), 15R probability variation (actual 5R), etc.) in which only the same degree of ball ejection (ball ejection) as that of 7R jackpot or 5R jackpot can be obtained. Then, a prize may be generated even in the round with a short opening period as described above, and in such a case, the prize ball is paid out. Therefore, the actual amount of balls to be paid out is the second index display unit 204a. It may exceed the value displayed in ~ 204h.

Further, the combination of the character type and each index such as the probability variation expectation degree and the ball output amount is not limited to the combination described here. Further, for each index, it is possible to adopt an index other than the probability change expectation degree and the amount of balls to be output. For example, instead of the amount of balls to be ejected, the rate of winning the maximum number of rounds (15R in this case) of the jackpots (for example, it can be referred to as "maximum ball ejection rate") is adopted as one of the indexes. It is possible. Furthermore, in addition, for example, it is possible to adopt an index such as the order of the strength (win rate) of the ally character, the ratio of performing the special move, and the like.

Then, when the ratio of performing the special move is adopted as an index, for example, if the main character or the ally character beats the enemy character with its own predetermined special move, the maximum number of rounds and the amount of balls to be released However, if you win with a technique that is not a special move, you can adopt a production control such as a relatively small number of rounds or a big hit with a large amount of balls.

Here, the above-mentioned effect state display area 206 shown in FIG. 25A can display the state of the effect at that time. In the example of FIG. 25A, the appearing character (character H) and the probability variation expectation degree (here, “96% or more”) associated with the character are displayed as characters in the effect state display area 206. ing. Further, the above-mentioned jackpot game status display area 207 can display the progress status of the special game which is the jackpot game. In the example of FIG. 25 (a), the number of rounds at that time (here, the 3rd round) and the acquisition status of the prize balls (here, 450 as the current reward) are displayed in characters in the jackpot game state display area 207. There is.

Further, the above-mentioned message display area 208 shown in FIG. 25A can display a message according to the state of the effect at that time. In the example of FIG. 25A, a message indicating that the generated jackpot is the "fourth jackpot" is continuously displayed as a telop in the message display area 208. Further, the above-mentioned right-handed display area 209 can display that the situation should be right-handed. In the example of FIG. 25 (a), the character display of "right-handed" is performed.
<< Character placement determination method (during round battle) >>
<<< First sort related to list production during round production >>>

Next, a method of determining the arrangement of the characters A to H in the list effect of FIGS. 25A and 25B will be described. The chart of FIG. 26A shows the relationship between each character A to H and an index such as a probability variation expectation degree and a ball output amount. The uppermost part of the chart of FIG. 26A corresponds to the above-mentioned first index display units 202a to 202d, and the uppermost part shows the classification of characters (groups 1 to 4) based on the probability variation expectation. ing. Further, in the next row (second row from the top) in FIG. 26A, the above-mentioned character types (A to H) are shown.

Further, in the next stage (third stage from the top) in FIG. 26 (a), numerical values indicating the probability variation expectation of each character A to H are shown, and in the next stage (fourth stage from the top). Indicates a numerical value representing the amount of balls ejected for each character A to H. Then, the classification of the probability change expectation degree, the character, and the arrangement (order) of the row direction in the amount of balls to be ejected in the chart of FIG. 26 (a) are the probability changes in the list production shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b). The group of expectation, the character, and the amount of balls to be ejected match in the horizontal direction. Then, the arrangement of the characters and the like in the list effect shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b) is determined based on the arrangement of the characters and the like in FIG. 26 (a).

Note that the lowermost part of FIG. 26A shows an index for an embodiment different from the present embodiment, and the jackpot expectation of each character A to H is used as an index other than the probability variation expectation and the ball output amount. Shown. An embodiment using this jackpot expectation as an index will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the approximate probability variation expectations of the characters A to H are 20%, 25%, 50%, 44%, 45%, 70%, and 73 in order from the left as shown in FIG. 26 (a). %, 96% or more (96% ~). As for the group 1 to which the characters A and B belong (the group having one star mark), the probability change expectation increases from the left to the right in the figure.

This group 1 can be comprehensively referred to as a group having a probability variation expectation of about 20% (or about 25%, etc.). Hereinafter, this group 1 may be referred to as a "group of about 20%", a "group of about 25%", or a "inferior group". Further, the amount of balls ejected for the characters A and B of Group 1 is 2250 and 1050 as described above, and contrary to the probability variation expectation, the amount of balls ejected decreases from left to right in the figure. It has become.

Next, for group 2 to which characters C to E belong (groups with two star marks), the probability variation expectations are 50%, 44%, and 45% as shown from left to right in the figure. In each case, it is larger than the maximum value of the probability variation expectation related to the group 1 (here, 25% of the character b). This group 2 can be comprehensively referred to as a group of about 50%, for example. Hereinafter, this group 2 may be referred to as a “about 50%” group, or a “50:50 (fifty fifty)” group. Further, the ball ejection amounts of the characters C to E of the group 2 are 2250, 1050, and 750 as described above, and the ball ejection amount decreases from the left to the right in the figure.

Next, for group 3 to which characters F and G belong (groups with three star marks), the probability variation expectations are 70% and 73%, as shown from left to right in the figure, and both are It is larger than the maximum value of the probability variation expectation related to group 2 (here, 50% of characters C and E). This group 3 can be comprehensively referred to as a group having an expected value of probability change of about 70% (or about 80%, etc.). In the following, this group 1 may be referred to as a "group of about 70%", a "group of about 80%", or a "dominant group". Further, the amount of balls ejected for the characters F and G of Group 3 is 2250 and 1050 as described above, and contrary to the probability variation expectation, the amount of balls ejected decreases from left to right in the figure. It has become.

Subsequently, with respect to the group 4 to which the character H belongs (the group having four star marks), only one type of character belongs (character H). The probability variation expectation of the character H of the group 4 is 96% or more, which is larger than the maximum value of the probability variation expectation of the group 3 (here, 80% of the character g). This group 4 can be referred to as a group in which the probability of change is almost confirmed. In the following, this group 4 may be referred to as a "almost probable change confirmed group" or a "super heat group". Further, the amount of balls ejected for the character H in the group 4 is 2250 as described above.

Regarding the above-mentioned group 2, the magnitude relation of the probability variation expectation degree relating to the characters C to E to which the characters belong is irregular rather than ascending (or descending) from left to right in the figure. In the example of FIG. 26A, the probability variation expectation of the character C located at the left end in the figure in the group 2 is 50%, and the probability variation expectation of the character D on the right side is higher than that of the character C. Is also low at 44%. Further, here, the probability variation expectation of the character arranged on the right side of the character D is 45%, which is higher than that of the character D and lower than that of the character C.

In this way, the magnitude relation of the probability variation expectation differs between group 1 and group 2 because a plurality of types of character sorting rules (sorting rules) are defined (here, the first sorting rule). And the second sort rule). That is, in this embodiment, the probability variation expectation is adopted as the index for the first sort rule (first index), and the payout amount is adopted as the index for the second sort rule (second index). ing. Then, as data processing for determining the approximate arrangement of the characters, the entire characters A to H are sorted (first sort) according to the first sort rule based on the probability variation expectation (in the present embodiment). Is not the actual numerical value of the probability variation expectation of each character, but the number of stars indicating the probability variation expectation, that is, sorted by group). The sorting according to the above-mentioned second sorting rule (second sorting) will be described later.

For the characters A to H shown in FIG. 26 (a), the probability variation expectation is 20%, 25%, 50%, 44%, 45%, 70%, 73%, 96% or more as described above. There is. Therefore, the character arrangement determined by the first sort is not shown, but in ascending order of probability variation expectation, character A (20%), character B (25%), character D (44%), and character E. (45%), character C (50%), character F (70%), character G (73%), and character H (96% or more).

Then, grouping is performed based on the result of this first sort, and in ascending order of probability variation expectation, two characters A and B are group 1 (one star), and three characters C to E are group 2 (stars). (2) Two characters F and G are classified into group 3 (three stars), and one maximum character H is classified into group 4 (four stars).

As described above, the characters A to H are not limited to the allocation according to the number of characters in the group, and for example, the threshold value for grouping after the first sort (threshold value related to the probability variation expectation degree) is set. Characters with a probability variation expectation of 0 to less than 40% are classified into group 1, characters of 40% or more and less than 60% are classified into group 2, and characters of 60% or more and less than 90% are classified into group 3. , 90% or more of the characters can be classified into group 4.
<<< Second sort during round production >>>

Next, the above-mentioned second sort based on the amount of balls (reward) will be described. In this second sort, the characters are arranged from left to right in each group in FIG. 26A in ascending order of the amount of balls to be ejected. For example, in group 1, the amount of balls output by character A is 2250, and the amount of output of character B is 1050. As for the amount of balls to be ejected, since the value for the character B is large as in the probability variation expectation degree, the arrangement of the characters A and B is not changed by the second sort, and the arrangement of the characters A and B is the first. It is the same as the arrangement by sorting.

On the other hand, in Group 2, the amount of balls output by character C is 2250, the amount of output of character D is 1050, and the amount of output of character E is 750. Is different from the magnitude relation of the probability change expectation (44%, 45%, 50% in the order of D, E, C). Then, the second sort is prioritized in the group, and the arrangement of the characters C to E is rearranged in the order of the character C, the character D, and the character E from the left in FIG. 26 (a) according to the magnitude relation of the amount of balls to be ejected. Be done.

Subsequently, the second sort is also performed for the group 3, but as in the group 1, since the magnitude relationship between the ball output amount and the probability change expectation level is the same, the arrangement of the characters F and G is changed by the second sort. Is not done. Further, since the group 4 belongs to only one character, the character arrangement is not changed by the second sort. Here, in FIG. 26A, the row showing the first index related to the first sort is represented as “sort order 1”, and the row showing the second index related to the second sort is “sort order 2”. ".

In this way, once the characters are grouped by the rough arrangement of the characters by the first sort, the arrangement within the group may be changed by the second sort. Then, the arrangement change by the second sort is not performed depending on the arrangement deciding factors such as the result of the first sort, the value related to the second index (here, the amount of balls to be output), the type of the character, and the result of the first sort. May remain.

Further, the arrangement of the characters can make it easier for the player to recognize, for example, that the characters are sequentially strengthened or weakened in one direction. This point can be said in the same manner even if the characters A to H are arranged and displayed at the stage where the first sort is performed and the second sort is not performed. In addition to these points, by further performing the second sort, it is possible to give a change based on other rules to a part of the whole, not simply in the ascending or descending order.

In the present embodiment, the results of the first sort are grouped (groups 1 to 4), and the arrangement is changed based on the second sort within the group. Therefore, the overall impression of the character arrangement based on the first sort is performed. Is given to the player, and among them, the player can be encouraged to think that the maximum number of balls can be obtained by winning a predetermined character. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the character arrangement and the impression given to the player.

Further, for example, when there is a character that the player wants to emphasize, even if the character is not displayed in a prominent position in the first sort, it can be placed in a prominent position in the second sort. Sex arises. Therefore, even if the desired effect cannot be obtained by simply performing the first sort, there is a possibility that the character can be placed in a prominent position by the second sort.

As the "conspicuous position" here, for example, an end portion (left and right end portions in the example of FIG. 25B) and a central portion of the list display area 201 can be exemplified. When the number of character display units (203a to 203h) is an even number as in the example shown in FIG. 25 (b), the portion near the center can be the above-mentioned central portion.

In addition, before performing the second sort, it is also possible to determine whether or not the magnitude relationship between the ball output amount and the probability change expectation degree match, and if they do match, do not perform the second sort. Is. Similarly, it is also possible to determine whether or not there is only one character belonging to the group before performing the second sort, and if there is only one character, not perform the second sort.

Further, for example, when executing the battle effect as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the symbol ratio of "hit 2" is set to 100% except when the battle effect is performed (when the battle effect is not performed). When the battle effect is not performed, it is conceivable that only "hit 2" out of "hit 1" and "hit 2" is generated. Then, the game property in this case is that if the battle effect is not executed during the variable effect, "1 win" does not occur, which can discourage the player.
<< Effects of the invention by performing the first sort and the second sort >>

According to the Pachinko game machine that performs the list production as described above, the characters are sorted by the first index such as the probability variation expectation and the jackpot expectation, and then the characters are sorted by using another second index. .. Therefore, it is possible to sort characters in a complex and complicated manner. For example, as in the example of Group 2 related to the probability change expectation degree and the jackpot expectation degree shown in FIG. 26A, the order may be changed, and therefore, depending on the value of one index. Compared to simply arranging in ascending or descending order, more complicated and diverse sorting is possible.

Further, it can be said that the list effect is an effect of determining the display order of the characters in a plurality of stages (here, two stages). For this reason, for example, it is possible to perform an effect such that the effect modes that may be transferred associated with the character are once narrowed down to a predetermined number, and then the effect modes that are likely to be transferred are gradually narrowed down.

In addition, the list effect can be used in combination with other effect functions, such as a limited frequency pattern effect and a look-ahead effect. And, also by this, various productions become possible as described above.
<<< Calculation method of probability change expectation (win rate) >>>

Next, the method for calculating the probability variation expectation (win rate) described above will be described. The chart of FIG. 26B shows the distribution between the probable change and the non-probable change (normal) at the time of a big hit, and the distribution of the effect (probable change effect) in the case of the probable change. Then, in the present embodiment, when the probability changes, "Character A Battle", "Character B Battle", ..., "Character H Battle", which are battle effects using characters A to H, are executed. In some cases, the production is performed so that the type of jackpot (type of probability variation jackpot) differs depending on the character who won the battle.

In the example of FIG. 26 (b), the type of the chart (here, "round effect distribution") is described at the upper left end of the chart, and "selection rate (%)" and "selection rate (%)" are described on the right side. × Symbol ratio (%) ”is described. Furthermore, on the right side, the "win rate", which is the probability change expectation, is described. Below these (next stage), there are "no battle" as the type of production related to the special game (big hit game), and "defeat hit", "hit 1", "hit 2", which are the production with round battle. "Defeat hit (a)", "hit 1 (b)", "hit 2 (c)", and "b + c" are described. Of these, "defeat hit", "hit 1", and "hit 2" correspond to the above-mentioned types of jackpots (see FIG. 24). The meanings of "defeat hit (a)", "hit 1 (b)", "hit 2 (c)", and "b + u" will be described later.

Further, at the left end portion (front side) of FIG. 26B, items related to the type of effect are shown. Specifically, the "basic normal round effect" and the "special normal round effect" below it indicate the round effect when the battle effect is not performed. Of these, the "basic normal round production" collectively shows the basic ones of a series of round productions that are not battle productions. In addition, the "special normal round production" collectively shows a specific one of a series of round productions that are not battle productions. As this "special normal round effect", a round effect in the case of a sudden change (sudden probability) can be exemplified.

The numerical values of "95", "0", "0", and "0" shown on the right side of the "basic normal round production" indicate that the selection ratio of the "basic normal round production" is "no round battle" and "defeat". It is shown that the values are 95%, 0%, 0%, and 0% for each of the cases of "hit", "hit 1", and "hit 2". In addition, the numerical values of "5", "0", "8.8", and "10" shown on the right side of the above-mentioned "special normal production" indicate that the selection ratio of "special normal round production" is "no round battle". , "Hit 1", "Hit 1", and "Hit 2", respectively, show that they are 5%, 0%, 8.8%, and 10%.

Further, "Character A Battle" to "Character H Battle" shown in FIG. 26B indicate the types of battle effects. The "character A battle" indicates a battle effect in which the character A wins, and the "character B battle" indicates a battle effect in which the character B wins. Similarly, "Character C Battle" to "Character H Battle" indicate a battle effect in which the corresponding characters C to H win.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the selection ratio of "Character A Battle" is 21% in the case of "defeat hit", 3.7% in the case of "hit 1", and in the case of "hit 2". Is 0%. In the present embodiment, as described above, the symbol ratios (round distribution) of "hit defeat", "hit 1", and "hit 2" are set to 35%, 50%, and 15%. Therefore, when the selection ratio of "Character A Battle" is calculated using the symbol ratio, it is 7.35% (= 21% x 0.35), 1.85% (= 3.7 x 0.5). It becomes 0% (= 0% × 0). Hereinafter, these will be referred to as “design selection ratio” related to each effect.

As mentioned above, "defeat hit" is a type of jackpot in which the character loses the battle, and "hit 1" and "hit 2" are types of jackpot in which the character wins the battle. is there. Therefore, for the winning percentage of the character, the symbol selection ratio of "defeat hit" is "A", the symbol selection ratio of "hit 1" is "a", and the symbol selection ratio of "hit 2" is "c". When expressed, it can be calculated by the formula (a + c) / (a + i + c).

Taking the above-mentioned "Character A battle" as an example, the value of (a + c), which is the total of the symbol selection ratios of the probabilistic jackpot, is 1.85 (= 1.85 + 0) as shown in FIG. 26 (b). It becomes. Further, the probability (win rate) that the character A wins and becomes one of the probabilistic jackpots is (1.85 + 0) / (7.35 + 1.85 + 0) ≈0.20 = 20%. Then, this winning percentage is calculated as the probability variation expectation degree (20%) of the character A shown in FIG. 26 (a).

Similarly, for the "character B battle" in FIG. 26 (b), the selection ratio of the "character B battle" is 18% in the case of "defeat hit", 1% in the case of "hit 1", and "hit". In the case of "2", it is 10.5%, and the symbol ratios of "hit defeat", "hit 1", and "hit 2" are 6.3%, 0.5%, and 1.575%. .. Then, the total value of the symbol selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot is 2.075, and the winning percentage of the character B is 2.075 / (6.3 + 0.5 + 1.575) ≈25%. Although the winning reward (ball output amount) of character B is shown to be "1050" in FIG. 25, the output as shown in the previous embodiment, such as participation in a friendly character as a production during a big hit, is shown. Since it may be accompanied by a ball promotion effect or an effect such as a ball output amount of "2250" when a special move is performed to defeat an enemy, "Character B Battle" is used when the ball output amount is "2250". Is to be expanded. The same applies to other character battles other than the ball output amount "2250", and it is set so that only the character battle with the ball output amount "2250" is not executed at "per 2".

Further, for "Character C battle" to "Character H battle", the symbol selection ratio is obtained from the selection ratios of "defeat hit", "hit 1", and "hit 2" shown in FIG. 26 (b). As a result, the winning percentages of characters C to H are approximately 50%, 44%, 45%, 70%, 73%, and 96%. Then, these winning percentages are taken as the probability variation expectation degree shown in FIG. 26A, and are used as an index of sorting (first sorting) of characters A to H.

The character on the sub-main board 301 is determined based on the appearance rate of the character described later. The character on the sub-main board 301 is not uniformly determined by the main fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 102, but is independently determined on the sub-main board 301 from a plurality of characters to be selected. It may happen.

Therefore, the winning percentage calculation method as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b) and 27 (a) to 27 (c) described later is a variation pattern of the fluctuation pattern on either the main board 102 or the sub-main board 301. It does not indicate the decision rate. Then, the winning percentage calculation method illustrated by FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b) and FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) comprehensively determines the result of a series of fluctuation pattern determinations by the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301. It can be said that it is conceptualized and shown.
<< Production control mode related to command reception during round production >>

Here, as an effect control mode for executing the effect related to each character during the round effect, the following can be exemplified. For example, the command sent from the main to the sub during the big hit does not particularly include the command to specify the effect. Then, when the round effect is a battle effect, the 1st round big hit middle demo 1 (command at the time of opening the big hit medium big winning opening) related to the symbol 1 or the symbol 2 is sent from the main board 102.

The sub-main board 301 sends a sub-main command related to the 1st R production (such as the production in which the main character and the character B face each other) according to the memorized battle production partner information (here, character B) to the sub-sub board 302. send. Further, when the demo 2 during the big hit related to the 2nd R is sent from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301, the sub-main board 301 determines whether the 2R-th effect (the main character or the character B will attack). It is possible to send a sub-main command corresponding to the effect to be displayed).
<< Big hit symbol look-ahead [ALL_MAX zone] etc. >>

Next, the effects other than the “character A battle” to the “character H battle” in FIG. 26B will be described. FIG. 26B shows the winning percentages related to “ALL_MAX trigger” and “character K participation” as effects other than “character A battle” to “character H battle”. Here, a case where these "ALL_MAX trigger" and "Character K participation" effects are selected as round effects together with "Character A battle" to "Character H battle" will be described.

In addition, "ALL_MAX trigger" and "Character K participation" are executed not only as the round effect described here, but also in the variation effect before the big hit occurs (for example, during reach) and the fluctuation effect in the out-of-order fluctuation before the big hit. It relates to a series of look-ahead effects and variable effects to be performed, and further execution of a round effect during a big hit. Specifically, based on the information (pre-reading information such as winning symbols and fluctuation patterns) that triggers the execution of the round production of these "ALL_MAX trigger" and "Character K participation", the pre-reading effect such as "ALL_MAX zone" described later is performed. Will be executed. When these effects are executed as variable effects, they can be executed as a pre-reading effect that takes into account the result of the pre-reading lottery based on the reserved memory information or the result of the pre-reading lottery of the symbol, and further, the winning / failing lottery. It can also be executed as a limited frequency pattern production that is not based on the look-ahead result of. Then, when these effects are executed as variable effects, they will be described as appropriate after the description of the execution as round effects is given.

Of these "ALL_MAX trigger" and "Character K participation", "ALL_MAX trigger" is pre-reading information, and indicates that the degree of expectation of transition to production such as "ALL_MAX zone" is relatively high.

Here, "ALL_MAX" is called "All Max". Further, the "ALL_MAX zone" can be referred to as the "ALL_MAX mode". Then, the "ALL_MAX zone" indicates to the player that any of the remaining characters at that time will be a jackpot (15R jackpot) with the maximum amount of balls (2050 in this case) regardless of which character wins. It is a zone (game section).

Furthermore, the characters that appear when the "ALL_MAX zone" is executed (such as when the look-ahead information related to the execution of the "ALL_MAX trigger" is stored) are randomly determined by a predetermined character lottery. There is. Then, this "ALL_MAX zone" can be determined (selected) when the information that the "hit 1" and "defeat hit" are hit is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. It is a directing.

Further, the "ALL_MAX trigger" that can be a trigger for the "ALL_MAX zone" can be determined in the case of "defeat hit" and "hit 1". Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the selection ratio of "ALL_MAX trigger" is 2% in the case of "defeat hit", 37% in the case of "hit 1", and in the case of "hit 2". Is 0%. Furthermore, the symbol ratios of "defeat hit", "hit 1", and "hit 2" are 0.7%, 18.5%, and 0%, and the total value of the symbol selection ratios of the probability variation jackpot is 18.5. .. When "ALL_MAX trigger" is selected, the ratio of "1 win" (referred to as "win rate" here) is 96%, which is the same as the win rate of the above-mentioned character H.
<< Character K participation mode >>

Next, the above-mentioned "character K participation" will be described. This "character K participation" is a production in which the character K, whose appearance rate is relatively low, participates in the battle. In FIG. 26 (b), "(premier)" is added to the name of "character K participation". Then, this "character K participation" is determined only when the "win 1" is won. Further, when "Character K participation" is decided, the corresponding fluctuation pattern is also selected. In addition, the character K that appears in "Character K participation" is provided as a character that cannot be defeated.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the selection ratio of "Character K participation" is 0% in the case of "defeat hit", 10% in the case of "hit 1", and in the case of "hit 2". It is 0%. Further, the symbol ratios of "defeat hit", "hit 1", and "hit 2" are 0%, 5%, and 0%, and the total value of the symbol selection ratios of the probabilistic jackpot is 5. When "Character K participation" is selected, the ratio of "1 win" (referred to as "win rate" here) is 100%.
<Production control mode related to variable production using list production>
<< Character placement determination method (during reach) >>
<<< First sort related to list production during variable production >>>

Next, a case where the list effect as shown in FIG. 25 (b) is executed during reach, before reach, or the like as a part of the variable effect will be described as described above. In FIG. 26A described above, the jackpot expectation degree is shown as an index for sorting used in the present embodiment. This jackpot expectation is an index (first index) used in place of the probability variation expectation of the embodiment in which the above-mentioned round battle effect is performed. Then, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree is used in combination with the above-mentioned second index, the amount of balls to be ejected.

The charts of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) show the winning percentage calculation method of each character A to H when the list effect as shown in FIG. 25 (b) is performed as a part of the variation effect. Here, in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), the loss in the winning / losing lottery is shown as "missing" in katakana.

In this embodiment related to the variable production, unlike the battle royal method of the round battle described above, the player side character is fixed to the main character, the main character and each character A to H perform the battle production, and the main character wins. In that case, a big hit occurs according to the type of the opponent character. Therefore, the winning percentage in the battle production with the characters A to H can be considered as the jackpot expectation of each character, and the jackpot expectation of each character in FIG. 26 (a) is shown in FIG. 27 (a). It is consistent with the winning percentage shown in (c). The method of calculating the winning percentage (expected jackpot) will be described later.

In FIG. 26A, the jackpot expectation (win rate) of each character A to H is 20%, 25%, 50%, 45%, 50%, 65%, 80%, 95% or more (95% to). ). Here, in order not to complicate the explanation, the magnitude relation related to the jackpot expectation of the characters A to H and the magnitude relation related to the probability variation expectation described above are matched, but the magnitude relation between the two is the same. It is not essential to be there.

Also in this embodiment, the second sort is performed after the first sort for the characters A to H, but the first sort is based on the jackpot expectation. For this reason, the character arrangement by the first sort is not shown, but in ascending order of jackpot expectation, character A (20%), character B (25%), character D (45%), characters C and E ( 50%), character F (65%), character G (80%), and character H (95% or more).

Then, grouping is performed based on the result of this first sort, and in ascending order of jackpot expectation, two characters A and B are group 1 (one star), and three characters C to E are group 2 (stars). (2) Two characters F and G are classified into group 3 (three stars), and one maximum character H is classified into group 4 (four stars).

When the jackpot expectations of the characters C and E are completely the same including the decimal point, the characters C and E can be treated as having the same rank. When the jackpot expectations of the characters C and E are different after the decimal point, it is possible to determine the order by the first sort in consideration of the difference after the decimal point.

Further, as in the embodiment using the probability variation expectation as an index, for example, a threshold value for grouping after the first sort (threshold related to the jackpot expectation) is set, and the jackpot expectation is less than 0 to 40%. Classify characters into group 1, classify 40% or more and less than 60% of characters into group 2, classify 60% or more and less than 90% of characters into group 3, and classify 90% or more of characters into group 4. Etc. are also possible.
<<< Second sort related to list production during variable production >>>

Subsequently, as in the case of the probability variation expectation degree, the second sort based on the amount of balls to be output is performed. Here, the values (and the magnitude relation) of the amount of balls output of the characters A to H are the same values as in the case of sorting based on the probability variation expectation. Then, due to the second sort, the order of the characters A, B, F to H is the same as that of the first sort, but the characters C to E are different from the order of the first sort. That is, in the case of the first sort, the characters D (45%) and the characters C and E (50%) were arranged in ascending order of the jackpot expectation, but as shown in FIG. 26A by performing the second sort. In addition, the characters C, D, and E are arranged in descending order of the amount of balls.
<<< Calculation method of jackpot expectation (win rate) >>>

Next, a method of calculating the winning percentage (big hit expectation) will be described based on FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c). First, FIG. 27A shows a method of calculating the winning percentage for each of the characters A to H in the case where the list effect as shown in FIG. 25B is executed as the reach effect. The "out of normal fluctuation" shown at the left end (front side) in the figure comprehensively means an effect pattern that does not reach (non-reach effect pattern). The "other reach" in the next stage comprehensively means the reach other than the character A reach to the character H reach, which will be described later, in the reach production.

Subsequently, the "character A reach" shown in FIG. 27 (a) means an effect of performing a list effect as shown in FIG. 25 (b), and a reach effect in which the character A remains in the end. This "Character A reach" may be a big hit after that, or may be a miss without being a big hit. In addition, the numerical value of "0.8" shown on the right side of "Character A reach" indicates the selection ratio (%) of "Character A reach" when the result of winning or failing is wrong. In addition, in FIG. 27A, the selection ratio of each effect is described as "1 variable distribution".

Further, "10" shown on the right side is "Character A reach" when the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit and the type of the big hit is "1 hit" which maximizes the amount of balls to be output as described above. The selection ratio (%) of "" is shown. In addition, "0" shown on the right side is the selection of "Character A reach" when the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit and the type of the big hit is "win 2" which does not maximize the amount of balls. The percentage (%) is shown.

That is, in the example of FIG. 27 (a), when "hit 2" is hit, "character A reach" is not selected. In terms of production, when it develops into "Character A Reach", it can be said that if it becomes a big hit, it will always be "1 hit", and if it does not become "1 hit", it will be missed.

Further, the numerical values of "0.784", "0.2", and "0" shown on the right side indicate "frequency of appearance in mode". This "appearance frequency in mode" indicates, for example, the ratio of the game results to "missing", "hit 1", and "hit 2" in the mode of "character A reach". Here, in order not to complicate the explanation, the jackpot probability is simplified to 1/50 (the probability of deviation is 49/50) and the calculation is performed, so the ratio of "missing" is 0.784 x (49 / 49 /). It is obtained by the calculation formula of 50). Further, the ratio of "per 1" is calculated by the formula of 0.2 x (1/50), and the ratio of "per 2" is calculated by the formula of 0 x (1/50). Has been done.

However, to be precise, it is necessary to include the symbol ratio related to the type of jackpot as shown in FIG. 24. That is, the symbol ratio is 50% for the 15R probability variation of "per 1", and 5% for the 10R probability variation, 7R probability variation, and 5R probability variation of "per 2". Therefore, more accurate calculation can be performed by multiplying "hit 1" by 0.5 and multiplying "hit 2" by 0.15. However, here, the calculation method considering the symbol ratio is omitted so that the explanation and the illustration are not complicated.

When it develops into "Character A Reach", the rate of losing the result of the game is 0.784 (about 78%), and the rate of "1 per hit" is 0.2 (20%). It has become. The rate at which the result of the game is "2 per hit" is 0 (0%).

Further, regarding "Character A reach", the numerical value of "0.2" shown on the right side is the total of "per 1" and "per 2" in "frequency of appearance in mode". Then, the numerical value of "win rate (selection rate of the production in which the main character wins)" shown on the right side is the numerical value of "total" in "frequency of appearance in mode", "missing", "1 hit", and It is obtained by dividing by the total of "per 2". Specifically, the percentage of the numerical value obtained by the calculation of 0.2 / (0.784 + 0.2 + 0) is shown as the value (20%) of the "win rate". The value of "20%" is in agreement with the jackpot expectation degree (20%) related to the character A shown in FIG. 26 (a).

Next, the next stage "Character B Reach" will be described. For this "Character B Reach", the "1 variable distribution" related to "Loss", "Hit 1", and "Hit 2" becomes "0.6", "2", and "8", respectively. There is. The "frequency of appearance in mode" related to "missing", "hit 1", and "hit 2" is "0.588", "0.04", and "0.16", and the character B has The "win rate" is 25%. This value of "25%" also matches the jackpot expectation (25%) of the character B in FIG. 26 (a).

Similarly, for "Character C reach" to "Character H reach" shown in the next and subsequent stages, the "win rate" of the corresponding characters C to H is calculated based on the value of "1 variable distribution". In the example of FIG. 27 (a), the winning percentages of the characters C to H are 50%, 45%, 50%, 67%, 80%, and 95%, and each character in FIG. 26 (a) has a winning percentage. It matches the jackpot expectation.

It should be noted that such a variable effect accompanied by a list effect can be used, for example, for a reach effect having a relatively high expectation of a big hit (high expectation) among the reach effects. Further, it is not limited to being executed as a reach effect, but can also be used as a pre-stage effect for a reach that is likely to develop into a reach effect with a high degree of expectation before the reach.

Further, the variation effect accompanied by the list effect is different from the variation pattern (here, the main variation pattern and the sub variation pattern) having an extremely short variation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) as in the above-described embodiment, and the effect display is displayed. It is desirable to positively present the taste to the player. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a variation pattern having a sufficient effect display time of at least 1 second to 3 seconds or more.

By doing so, it is possible to keep the number of games (the number of win / fail lottery, etc.) at an appropriate frequency depending on the fluctuation time. Then, when it is desired to keep the amount of balls ejected per predetermined time within a predetermined degree, it is possible to prevent the amount of balls ejected per predetermined time from becoming excessive, and it is possible to guarantee an appropriate game. The amount of balls to be played per predetermined time includes so-called "short-term balls to be played", "medium-term balls to be played", "long-term balls to be played", etc. According to the above-described embodiment, the amount of balls to be played is about 1 hour. It is particularly effective for collateralizing such "short-term payouts".

In addition, it is also possible to perform an effect during a specific game, for example, by combining it with an extremely short fluctuation pattern of about 0.6 seconds as in the above-described embodiment. Specifically, for example, in a game of 1 to 100 times (number of fluctuations) during a time reduction, a fluctuation pattern is determined from those that require a time of at least 1 second to 3 seconds or more, and after exceeding 100 times. During the specific game (or after the specific game), it is conceivable that the fluctuation pattern is determined from the ones of about 0.6 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to effectively guarantee the performance related to the amount of balls to be ejected per predetermined time (particularly short-term balls to be ejected).
<< Character appearance rate >>

Next, the appearance rate of characters when a plurality of characters appear will be described. When performing an effect in which any one of a plurality of characters appears, the selection rate of the main fluctuation pattern on the main board 102 is multiplied by the selection rate of the sub fluctuation pattern on the sub-main board 301, as described below. Therefore, the ratio of characters appearing (appearance rate) can be calculated. In the following, in order to simplify the explanation, the types of characters that can finally appear are five types, A to D. In addition, simplified numerical values are used for the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern and the selection ratio of each character.

For example, on the main board 102, the main fluctuation pattern 1 of the "character A battle" related to the character A, the main fluctuation pattern 2 of the "character B battle" related to the character B, and the main fluctuation related to the "character C battle" related to the character C. Consider the case where one of the three main fluctuation patterns of pattern 3 is selected. Then, the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 1 on the main substrate 102 is 5, the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 2 is 3, and the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 3 is 2. That is, it is assumed that the selection ratio of the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 is 5: 3: 2.

Subsequently, when the sub-main board 301 receives a command related to the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 3, one of a plurality of types of characters may be independently selected from one type of main fluctuation pattern. And. For example, when the main fluctuation pattern 1 is received by the sub-main board 301, the effect related to the character A can be selected at a rate of 80%, and the effect related to the character B can be selected at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the main fluctuation pattern 2 is received by the sub-main board 301, the effect related to the character B can be selected at a rate of 80%, and the effect related to the character C can be selected at a rate of 20%. Further, when the main fluctuation pattern 3 is received by the sub-main board 301, the effect related to the character C and the effect related to the character D can be selected at a ratio of 50% each.

That is, in the sub-main board 301, the sub-variation pattern is relatively often determined in a one-to-many (one-to-many) relationship in which a plurality of sub-variation patterns can be selected for one main fluctuation pattern. It has become like. As for the ratio of selecting the effect related to the character A on the sub-main board 301 (the appearance rate of the character A), the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 1 on the main board 102 is "5", and the ratio of selecting the effect on the sub-main board 301 is "5". Since the selection ratio of the character A is 80%, it becomes 4 (= 5 × 80%).

Further, the ratio of selecting the effect related to the character B on the sub-main board 301 (the appearance rate of the character B) is the sum of the ratio based on the main fluctuation pattern 1 and the selection ratio based on the main fluctuation pattern 2. That is, since the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 1 on the main board 102 is "5" and the selection ratio of the character B based on the main fluctuation pattern 1 on the sub-main board 301 is 20%, the main fluctuation pattern The selection ratio of character B based on 1 is 1 (= 5 × 20%).

Further, since the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 2 on the main board 102 is "3" and the selection ratio of the character B based on the main fluctuation pattern 2 on the sub-main board 301 is 80%, the main fluctuation pattern The selection ratio of character B based on 2 is 2.4 (= 3 × 80%). Then, the total value of these is 3.4 (= 1 + 2.4).

Further, the ratio of selecting the effect related to the character C on the sub-main board 301 (the appearance rate of the character C) is the sum of the ratio based on the main fluctuation pattern 2 and the selection ratio based on the main fluctuation pattern 3. That is, since the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 2 on the main board 102 is "3" and the selection ratio of the character C based on the main fluctuation pattern 2 on the sub-main board 301 is 20%, the main fluctuation pattern The selection ratio of character C based on 2 is 0.6 (= 3 × 20%).

Further, since the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 3 on the main board 102 is "2" and the selection ratio of the character C based on the main fluctuation pattern 3 on the sub-main board 301 is 50%, the main fluctuation pattern The selection ratio of the character C based on 3 is 1 (= 2 × 50%). Then, the total value of these is 1.6 (= 0.6 + 1).

Further, as for the ratio of selecting the effect related to the character D on the sub-main board 301 (the appearance rate of the character D), the selection ratio of the main fluctuation pattern 3 on the main board 102 is "2", and the ratio of selecting the effect on the sub-main board 301 is "2". Since the selection ratio of the character D is 50%, it becomes 1 (= 2 × 5%).

In this way, the appearance rate of the characters A to D can be determined, and the appearance rate of the characters A to D is character A: B: C: D = 4: 3.4: 1.6: 1. Even if the types of main fluctuation patterns and the types of characters that can be selected on the sub-main board 301 increase, the appearance rate of each character is determined by performing the same calculation for each main fluctuation pattern and character. It is possible to do.
<< Retirement production >>

Next, the charts of FIGS. 27 (b) and 27 (c) will be described. 27 (b) and 27 (c) show an example of calculating the winning percentage of each character in the case of performing a list effect as a limited frequency pattern effect. That is, while FIG. 27 (a) described above shows a case where "Character A reach" to "Character H reach" are executed as an effect pattern different from that of the limited frequency pattern effect. 27 (b) and 27 (c) show the case where "Character A reach" to "Character H reach" are executed as the limited frequency pattern effect used only in a specific case.

Of these, FIG. 27 (b) shows a list effect (here, referred to as "retirement effect") of a situation in which some predetermined characters (here, character B and character E) do not appear (retired) as opponents. ) Is performed. As a usage pattern of such a retirement effect, for example, a situation in which character B and character E have already been defeated and no longer participate in the battle can be exemplified. In this case, for example, the character display units 203b and 203e related to the characters B and E that no longer appear are displayed with an "x" mark (cross mark), and are displayed darker than the character display unit related to the surviving characters. It is possible to show that the corresponding character does not appear as an opponent.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the "1 variable distribution" related to "Character B reach" and "Character E reach" is "0" for any of "missing", "hit 1", and "hit 2". ", And" Character B Reach "and" Character E Reach "are not selected. Here, in FIG. 27B, a “−” (hyphen) is described in the “win rate” column to indicate that the characters B and E do not appear.

In addition, by providing a character that does not appear, the value of "1 variable distribution" related to the character that does not appear becomes "0", so it is necessary to change the value related to other characters and adjust the overall numerical balance. Occurs. In the example of FIG. 27 (a), each value of “missing”, “hit 1”, and “hit 2” related to character D and character G is increased as compared with the case of the normal frequency of FIG. 27 (a). I am trying to make adjustments. Further, in the example of FIG. 27A, the value of "per 1" related to the character H is also changed. In addition, the numerical values have been changed for "outside normal fluctuations" and "other reach" that do not produce a list.

It should be noted that such a retirement effect can be as follows. For example, it may be excluded from the start of the list production instead of retiring when the character is defeated. Further, when the limited frequency period ends, the sub-main board 301 may select an effect such as reviving one of the characters so as to match the effects.

Further, the retirement effect is not limited to the limited frequency pattern effect, but can be performed as a look-ahead effect or as a variable effect accompanying a mere advance notice lottery in the mode. Then, when performing as a look-ahead effect, it is retired depending on whether it corresponds to "hit 1" or "hit 2", whether it is a limited frequency period, or whether retirement due to a notice has occurred. It is conceivable to determine the character. When all the characters or a certain number or more (for example, the number of people on the list-1) are retired by the advance notice effect or the like, one of the characters may be revived.
<< Demoralization production >>

Subsequently, FIG. 27 (c) does not lead to defeat (retirement) as in the example of FIG. 27 (b), but is the morale of the predetermined characters (here, B and E) reduced? This is a case of performing a list production of situations such as (here, referred to as "morale reduction production"). In this case as well, for example, as in the case of the retirement effect, the “x” mark (cross mark) is displayed or darkened for the target characters B and E, and the fighting motivation is reduced. It is possible to show that the situation is present.

As shown in FIG. 27 (c), in the "1 variable distribution" related to "Character B reach", "missing" is "0.05", "hit 1" is "4", and "hit 2" is "hit 2". It is "16", which is changed from "0.6", "2", and "8" in the case of the normal frequency in FIG. 27 (a). Further, while the numerical value in the case of "missing" is decreasing, the numerical value in the case of "hit 1" or "hit 2" is increasing, and the ratio selected in the case of hit is increasing.

In addition, in the "1 variable distribution" related to "Character E reach", "missing" is "0.1", "hit 1" is "6", and "hit 2" is "34". It has been changed from "0.4", "3", and "17" in the case of the normal frequency of 27 (a). Further, while the numerical value in the case of "missing" is increasing, the numerical value in the case of "hit 1" or "hit 2" is decreasing, and the ratio of being selected in the case of losing is increasing. The "win rate" of "Character B Reach" and "Character E Reach" has increased from 25% and 50% in the case of normal frequency to 89% in both cases.

By performing such a demoralization effect, the character can be smoothly revived in the effect. The morale reduction effect can also be referred to as, for example, a “combat motivation reduction effect”. Further, in the case of the morale reduction effect, for example, it is conceivable to display the characters "It seems to be weak" on the effect display device 60.
<<"ALL_MAXZone" and "Character K Participation" in Variable Production >>

Next, a case where the above-mentioned "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation" are executed during the variable effect will be described. As described above, the "ALL_MAX zone" and the "character K participation" can be executed even during the variable production (before reach, during reach, etc.). Further, these effects can be executed as a look-ahead effect based on the reserved storage information or as a limited frequency pattern effect not based on the result of the winning / failing lottery.

In addition, when these "ALL_MAX zone" and "Character K participation" are executed as a variable effect, the jackpot is 100% or almost 100%, and the correlation with the jackpot. It is conceivable to strengthen relatively. Further, these "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation" can be said to be suitable for use in such an application of strengthening the correlation with the big hit when used as a variable effect. Then, the effect of strengthening the correlation with the big hit can be performed as a look-ahead effect based on the reserved storage information related to the result of the winning / losing lottery.

Furthermore, when these "ALL_MAX zone" and "Character K participation" are used as pre-reading effects, the execution rate when the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order is significantly lowered, and in the case of out of order, it is rarely executed. It is conceivable that it will be executed (almost only in the case of a big hit).

On the other hand, if these "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation" are used as a limited frequency pattern production performed in a manner that does not refer to the result of the winning / failing lottery, the "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation" are 15R jackpots. Since it is a rich production, it will develop into a character (battle) reach only when the winning / failing lottery is a hit and the 15R jackpot symbol, and the development rate to the battle reach is relatively lower than in the normal state. When these effects are used as limited frequency pattern effects, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order, the probability of shifting to the character (battle) reach effect is relatively low (in the case of out of order, it is rare). It is conceivable that it does not shift to).

FIG. 28A shows an example of an effect display when the player enters the “ALL_MAX zone” during a specific game. In the example of FIG. 28A, the character display of "ALL_MAX_ZONE" is performed in the effect state display area 206, and the ball output amount of all characters is displayed in the list display area 201 (display of the second index display unit). ) Have been changed to 2050. Here, FIG. 28B illustrates the mode during the variable effect, but the mode of the list effect as shown can be applied and used even during the round effect.

Further, as a specific mode of the production such as "ALL_MAX zone", the following can be further considered. For example, as a part of the production of "protagonist awakening", it is operated to combine a plurality of movable production members (operation of completing the character). Furthermore, as the content of the effect display, the attack of a predetermined character (main character or ally character) hits the enemy character (attack hit). Then, the enemy character collapses, the production that takes a predetermined time is executed, and the battle is won. Here, the production time (production scale) of the content that the enemy character collapses and the victory is confirmed is the time common to a plurality of enemy characters, and one of the productions that requires a common time is selected. To. On the other hand, when the battle is defeated, the attack does not hit the enemy character (does not hit), and the enemy character can escape. Here, the effect mode described is not something that cannot be applied to the battle effect, but it is considered that it is more preferable to perform the effect during the variable effect.

In addition, it can be considered that the effect of the "ALL_MAX zone" is maximized by being executed only when the jackpot symbol of the type corresponding to the maximum amount of balls is hit. .. For this reason, it is desirable that the "ALL_MAX zone" during the variable production is not executed as the limited frequency pattern production, but is executed as the look-ahead production (when the limited frequency production is performed, the hits other than 15R are other than the character battle reach. Because it is necessary to notify with, and the production balance will change). Further, the production of the "ALL_MAX zone" in the fluctuation production requires a certain amount of production time, and it is difficult to combine it with an extremely short fluctuation pattern such as 0.6. Therefore, it is desirable that the fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation pattern) for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or the like) or longer is selected on the main substrate 102 so that it can be selected.

FIG. 28B shows an example of the effect display when the character enters the “character K participation” during the specific game. In the example of FIG. 28B, the character display of "Character K participating in the war winning percentage 777%" is performed in the effect state display area 206, and all the characters are displayed in the retired mode in the list display area 201. ing. Further, in the message display area 208, the message "in agony" is continuously displayed as a telop. Here, FIG. 28B illustrates the mode during the variable effect, but the mode of the list effect as shown can be applied and used even during the round effect.
<Further diversification of list production>

The list effects (including retirement effects and morale reduction effects) described so far can be as follows. For example, regarding the battle effect, it is possible to execute an effect display in which characters of normal size or mini characters battle each other during the fluctuation (during the fluctuation effect). The "mini character" referred to here is a character in which, for example, characters A to H are drawn with two heads. In addition, the battle effect can be a battle between the main character (vs) enemy character, ally character vs. enemy character, or between enemy characters. The results of variable effects such as battle effects in situations where the reach has not developed are reflected in the list as demoralized effects and retirement effects.

Further, the battle effect may be started and ended during one fluctuation (during one fluctuation) (those that fit within the fluctuation time related to one fluctuation), and may be a plurality of fluctuations (multiple fluctuations). It may be one that is executed from the start to the end across the above (those that do not fit in the fluctuation time related to one fluctuation and require a plurality of fluctuations). In addition, the battle effect can be such that when a predetermined character (for example, the main character) appears, the main character does not lose at all or hardly loses.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned retirement effect, the predetermined time (for example, the first variation) of the plurality of variable effects in which the limited frequency pattern effect is performed is performed by using the pattern table for the retirement effect (retirement effect table). , It is possible to determine the effect for notifying the character to be retired. In this case, the control mode can be such that the main board 102 determines the main fluctuation pattern using the limited frequency pattern table, and the sub-main board 301 determines the sub-variation pattern using the retirement effect table. is there.

Further, for example, it is possible to adopt an effect control mode in which a mini character (or a character in a normal form) battles and the display contents of the values of the first index and the second index are changed according to the result of victory or defeat. Is. Then, depending on the result of the battle, it is conceivable to increase or decrease the number of stars indicating the probability variation expectation (or the hit expectation) and the numerical value of the amount of balls to be ejected.

For example, when the retirement effect is executed as the limited frequency pattern effect as described above, in the situation where the character with a predetermined amount of balls is retired, the jackpot corresponding to the amount of balls of the retired character is not hit. It is possible that it will be done. In order to prevent such inconsistency between the character situation and the lottery result, the retired character may be revived, and the character may be revived according to the winning result.

In addition, in terms of production, we will not treat it as retirement, but will produce morale reduction and injury, and by recovering morale and injury, we will try to match the character's ball output amount (or jackpot expectation etc.) with the winning result. It is also possible. In addition, the numerical value such as the amount of balls to be ejected is reduced due to a decrease in morale or injury, and the numerical value such as the amount of balls to be ejected is returned to the base or increased from the initial value (default value) due to the recovery of morale or injury. Is also possible. It is conceivable that characters with a high expectation of big hits will be associated with a small amount of balls, and characters with a large amount of balls will be associated with a low expectation of big hits, but morale and injury. It is conceivable to raise the jackpot expectation (win rate) or reduce the amount of balls to be played when there is a recovery.

On the side of the sub-main board 301, it is not possible to limit or change the type of hit transmitted from the main board 102 to a specific one. For this reason, the main board 102 hits a jackpot corresponding to the amount of balls ejected, whereas the sub-main board 301 has a sub-variation pattern that wins the character associated with the amount of balls ejected 2250. It is necessary to prevent inconsistency (mismatch) between the content of the production and the amount of balls (reward), such as the selection of. Then, as a countermeasure in such a case, on the sub-main board 301, an effect of changing the relationship between the character type and the ball ejection amount (the lawyer) is executed, and the ball ejection amount is changed to 750 pieces. Consistency can be considered.

Furthermore, when a teammate character battles, it is possible to execute the list effect as a look-ahead effect. For example, as a look-ahead effect, when an ally character defeats an enemy character, the amount of balls of the defeated enemy character at that time is accumulated (stocked). Then, when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the trigger hold related to the look-ahead (variation effect of the trigger fluctuation) is performed, the stocked ball output amount is added (added) to the ball output amount of the enemy character at that time. It is possible to do so.

More specifically, for example, a character with a ball output amount of 750 is defeated at the time of the look-ahead effect, and at the next variable effect, it is developed into a battle effect with a character with a ball output amount of 1050 pieces (750 pieces). For example, the production is executed as the amount of balls to be output (+1050 pieces).

However, for example, when a character with a payout amount of 750 is defeated as a look-ahead effect and 2250 characters appear due to a trigger fluctuation, the total payout amount (3000 in this case) is a big hit once. It is also possible that the value exceeds the maximum amount of balls (2250 in this case). In such a case, for example, it is conceivable to limit the display of the total ball output amount to 2250 and perform an effect using the maximum difference ball output amount (750 in this case).

More specifically, it is directed to inform the player that there is an excess difference, and the difference is directed so as to fuel the expectation that leads to an increase (up) in the numerical value of the index such as the jackpot expectation and the probability change expectation. It is possible to proceed. In this case, the index is not limited to the one that always increases, and it is also possible to produce a production that does not increase after being fanned (so-called Gase). Furthermore, as a production that arouses expectations that lead to an increase in the index, it is possible to exemplify an example of showing the progress of a battle or a mission and increasing the index when the battle is won or the mission is successful. In addition, it is conceivable that the larger the amount of difference, the easier it is for the index to increase.

In addition, it is considered that the time required for the production tends to be long by including the scene of the battle. For this reason, a notice (line notice) is given by displaying the line, and for example, when the line "Character B seems to have been killed" is displayed, the character B is retired, or "Character B is motivated." It is possible to lower the morale of character B when the line "It seems that there is no such thing" is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to change the situation of the character in a short time. Then, in changing the situation of the character, for example, when the number of holds is more than a predetermined number (for example, 2), a battle effect is executed, and when the number of holds is small, a dialogue notice is executed. It is possible.
<< A production control mode that links retirement production and morale reduction production with the number of time reductions >>

In FIG. 22 (b-3) described above, an example in which the fluctuation pattern table is changed according to the type of the symbol is shown, but it is conceivable that the fluctuation pattern table is also changed for the retirement effect and the morale reduction effect. Eh. FIG. 29 (a) is a chart showing the transition of the limited frequency pattern effect related to the retirement effect and the morale decrease effect. In FIG. 29 (a), the symbol D indicates a normal time-saving / medium-time variation pattern table as in the case of the above-mentioned example.

Further, the symbol E in FIG. 29A shows a fluctuation pattern table related to the retirement effect, and the symbol F indicates a fluctuation pattern table related to the morale reduction effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables related to retirement effects and fluctuation pattern tables related to morale reduction effects are provided. The symbol E'(e-dash) in the figure indicates a variation pattern table related to another type of retirement effect, and the symbol F'(f-dash) indicates a variation pattern related to another type of demoralization effect. Shows the table.

In the example shown in FIG. 29 (a), four types of 15R probability variations 1 to 4 are shown as the symbols related to the 15R probability variation, and on the right side thereof, the variation pattern used according to the number of symbol variation during the time reduction. The table is shown.

For example, when the symbol of the 15R probability variation 1 is hit, the variation pattern table D is used while the number of variations is 1 to 30 in the time-saving game after the special game is completed. Further, the variation pattern table E related to the retirement effect is used while the number of fluctuations during the time reduction is 31 to 60 times, and the variation pattern table used is returned to D during the period of 61 to 90 times. Then, while the number of fluctuations during the time reduction is 91 to 120 times, E', which is another fluctuation pattern table related to the retirement effect, is used. It can be said that such a transition of the fluctuation pattern table is a transition to a non-retirement effect after the retirement effect, and then to another retirement effect.

Further, when the symbol of 15R probability variation 2 is hit, the number of fluctuations during the time reduction is between 1 and 30 times, and between 31 and 60 times, as in the case of hitting the symbol of 15R probability variation 1. Fluctuation pattern tables D and E are used. Further, when the number of fluctuations during the time reduction is 61 to 90 times, the fluctuation pattern table F related to the morale reduction effect is used, and when the number of fluctuations is 91 to 120 times, the fluctuation pattern table E related to the retirement effect is used. ´ is used. It can be said that such a transition of the fluctuation pattern table is a transition to another retirement effect after the retirement effect, the morale decrease effect, and so on.

Similarly, when the symbol of 15R probability variation 3 is hit, the variation pattern table is used in the order of D, F, F', E'. It can be said that such a transition of the fluctuation pattern table shifts from the demoralization effect to another demoralization effect, continues the demoralization effect, and then shifts to the retirement effect.

Further, when the symbol of the 15R probability variation 4 is hit, the variation pattern table is used in the order of D, F', E, and F. It can be said that such a transition of the fluctuation pattern table shifts from the demoralization effect to the retirement effect and shifts to another demoralization effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 29A, the fluctuation pattern table is changed every 30 games (30 times), but the variation pattern table is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, for example, every 20 times or every 40 times. You may make changes. Further, the fluctuation pattern table is switched at different times, for example, the fluctuation pattern table D for the 1st to 20th times and the fluctuation pattern table D for the 21st to 60th times, not limited to a fixed number of games. You may. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the switching of the variable pattern table is due to a predetermined table transition or a look-ahead, and it is possible to diversify the production. ..

Further, in the example of FIG. 29 (a), the maximum number of time reductions is 120 times, but the number of times is not limited to this, and may be less than 100 times or more than 120 times, for example. You may. The symbol 2 may be every 20 times, the symbol 3 may be every 15 times, and so on.

Furthermore, as the production content at the transition timing of each table, a method such as executing an production that has continuity of the display content across the transition timing (taking over the production content) or changing the scene. It is conceivable to prevent the continuity from being maintained (do not take over the contents of the production). Further, the transition of the fluctuation pattern table is not limited to the one illustrated in FIG. 29 (a), and various transitions can be adopted.
<< Production control mode in which list production and button production are related >>

Further, the list effect as described above can be related to the button effect using the operation button 22 described above. For example, when the list production is started, if the player repeatedly hits the operation button 22, the enemy characters are sequentially erased and retired, and then the enemy character becomes one and the battle production proceeds, or the enemy. It can be illustrated that all the characters disappear and it becomes a probability change (or a big hit).

When erasing the enemy characters in sequence, for example, it is possible to consider an effect in which the enemy characters are erased one by one each time the operation button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times (such as 5 times). Further, if the probability change or the big hit does not occur, it is possible to consider an effect that the enemy character is not erased any more even if the operation button 22 is repeatedly hit. Further, it is conceivable that the operation buttons 22 are repeatedly hit, and when the probability change or the big hit is confirmed, the predetermined movable effect members are displaced so as to be combined.

Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to being repeatedly hit by a predetermined number of times, and for example, the number of operations required to erase one enemy character may be different depending on the type of the enemy character or the situation. Further, a plurality of (including all cases) text characters may be deleted by one button operation. Further, in this case as well, a plurality of movable effect members may be combined.
<< Other display modes of list production >>

The display mode of the list effect is not limited to the horizontal one-row mode as shown in FIG. 25 (b), and various display modes can be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 29B, it is conceivable to arrange the display columns of groups 1 to 4 vertically and horizontally.

In the list effect shown in FIG. 29B, the inside of the square frame is evenly divided into four, and the first index display units 202a to 202d are provided above each divided area. Further, two types of character display units 203a to 203h are assigned to the first index display units 202a to 202d, and each of the groups 1 to 4 is composed of two types of characters. Further, each character display unit 203a to 203h is associated with a second index display unit 204a to 204h. Further, the character display units 203a to 203h on which the characters A to H are displayed are arranged in a ring shape.

Here, in the list production of the present embodiment, the characters are evenly assigned to the groups 1 to 4 so as not to complicate the explanation, but groups having different numbers of characters may be provided. Further, in FIG. 29B, the reference numerals for the second index display unit related to the characters B and C are omitted.

Values that serve as the first index, such as the probability variation expectation and the jackpot expectation, are set for each of the characters A to H, and the values related to the first index are, for example, FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b). It can be the same as the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 26 (a). Also in the present embodiment, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b) and FIG. 26 (a), the second sort is performed after the first sort, and the arrangement (order) of the characters A to H is changed. It has been decided.

For example, it is possible to display the list shown in FIG. 29B on the effect display device 60 and execute the list effect during the reach in the variable effect. Such a list effect can be executed as a look-ahead effect or as a limited frequency pattern effect. Furthermore, it can be used for any of the above-mentioned "ALL_MAX zone", "character K participation", retirement effect, and morale decrease effect.

The present invention is not limited to the various examples described above, and can be variously modified. For example, in the list production described so far, individual characters are displayed to indicate the development destination and the amount of balls to be ejected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the name of the production mode of the transition destination and the occurrence It is also possible to list the types of jackpots that may be made by displaying characters such as "XX mode" and "XX jackpot". Further, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine, and can be applied to, for example, an effect display related to a rotating body type game machine (slot machine).

10 Pachinko game machine, 50 game board, 52 game area, 53 main control display device,
62 1st start winning opening, 63 2nd starting winning opening, 70 1st special symbol display section,
71 2nd special symbol display, 91 1st prize opening, 92 2nd prize opening,
102 main board, 104 sub board, 301 sub main board,
302 Sub-sub board.

Claims (1)

The main control means to control the progress of the game,
An effect control means that receives the effect control information from the main control means and performs control processing according to the effect control information.
An image display means for displaying an image related to the effect determined by the effect control means is provided.
The main control means
A predetermined random number is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a lottery is performed based on the acquired random number, and in a situation where a predetermined lottery result is obtained, a process for making a profit state for the player is performed.
The effect control means can determine a list effect that causes the image display means to display a plurality of characters in a list in a predetermined arrangement order.
The arrangement order of the characters is determined by a predetermined first sort, and when there are characters having the same arrangement order determined by the first sort for a plurality of characters displayed in the list effect, the first sort. The arrangement order of a plurality of characters whose arrangement order is the same when arranged by one sort is determined by the second sort based on a rule different from the first sort .
The first sort and the second sort are sorts based on an index of the degree of expectation that a player is given a profit or the degree of advantage of a profit that can be given to a player, and the index is used to perform a predetermined effect. A game machine characterized in that it may be changed under the circumstances .

Images